JP2022171898A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the interest of a game.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation, revolution of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41. Then, an operation of stop switches 42-44 stops a corresponding reel, a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result stops, and a put-out of medals may be generated. Additionally, when a grant trigger scheduled in advance is satisfied, a main controller grants a point. A total point being a total value of the point reaches a privilege provision value, a predetermined privilege is provided. In a display control device 81, a sub point other than the granted point in a side of the main controller is derived, the sub point is added to the granted point to derive a performance possible point, and an execution control of a grant suggestion performance is carried out on the basis of the performance possible point.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, in the above-described gaming machines, etc., it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a numerical value giving means capable of giving a numerical value for a privilege based on a predetermined giving opportunity;
privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege to a player when the total value of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes a grant corresponding value corresponding to granting of the privilege;
a specific notification execution means for controlling such that a specific notification is executed by a predetermined notification means as a notification related to the privilege numerical value;
with
The specific notification executing means comprises a specific means for controlling the execution of the specific notification based on the specific information corresponding to the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or a value larger than the total value of the privilege numerical values. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. (a) is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing, (b) is a diagram showing an example of winning notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number update processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for shifting to the first AT mode; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for ending the first AT mode; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing second AT mode processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st point lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a point lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd point lottery. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. (a) is a flowchart showing point processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing release processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for point production execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for classification lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a point suggestion effect; (a) is a flowchart showing a point effect execution process according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a used point table. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a first point; 9 is a flow chart showing processing for a second point; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a point suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a point suggestion effect; 10 is a flow chart showing point processing according to the third embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a point effect execution process according to a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a rank information table. (a) is a flowchart showing point processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing release processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a privilege grant value and a point grant opportunity concerning a 5th embodiment. 8A is a flowchart showing a first AT mode termination process, and FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing a first section display process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number update processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a first point lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a second point lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of a point lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a figure which shows an example of a sub-point lottery table. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a point information storage area, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a trigger flag. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition suggestion production|presentation. (a) is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the trigger flag and the type lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the effect type and the effected points. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for provision suggestion effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between effectable points and type distribution. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for total suggestion effect; It is a figure which shows an example of a total suggestion production. It is a figure which shows an example of the classification lottery table for total suggestion production|presentation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for release. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of point production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of point production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the continuous effect according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. (a) is a flow chart showing an effect setting process at the time of all stop, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. (a) is a flow chart showing an effect setting process at the time of all stop, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an all-stop effect setting process according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the transition lottery table for high probability modes, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the classification lottery table for high probability modes. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a start-time effect setting process according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a classification lottery table. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for total suggestion effect; It is a figure which shows an example of the classification lottery table for the time of arrival. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the total suggestion production;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned makes it possible for the player to distinguish between the first minor winning combination and the second minor winning combination. It is also possible to understand that different small role winnings are established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are granted include first to tenth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to tenth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

The second and third re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

In the fourth replay, the “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, and “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the fourth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the fourth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The fifth replay includes the “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The sixth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the seventh replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The eighth replay consists of "BAR" symbols on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "BAR" symbols, "Cherry" symbols, "Ark shell" symbols or "Senior" symbols, and right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the tenth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th re-game win or the 10th re-game win stops on the activated line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the eighth replay or the tenth replay is won, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the eighth regame. However, in the case of the 10th re-game win, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 8th re-game win and the 10th re-game win. In the ninth re-game, winning is established when the eighth and tenth re-games cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 14) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operates, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of games is set to three and the specific number is set to three, three virtual medals are awarded on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the prescribed number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two virtual medals are awarded on the condition that there are credits. is input. In addition, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the prescribed number is set as 3 or 2 and the specific number is set as 3, 3 virtual medals are issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 2, 2 credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. Throwing of virtual medals is performed.

A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals.

The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when power is cut off by power failure processing (see FIG. 16), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the state of various sensors (see FIG. 14) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 is read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17 .

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed numbers of bets are set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state includes the lottery table for the 3-bet game, A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the game state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is displayed. to select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state. Select a lottery table. If the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 19) for the 3-bet game is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 20).

In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 19 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV positively determined in step S305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see step S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in 3-bet games, before winning the 1st BB, you can expect a decrease of about 1.50 medals per game (net increase minus about 1.50), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carryover state after winning the 1st BB, excluding the increase in the 1st BB state, a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 2.10 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in a 2-bet game, before winning the 2nd BB, you can expect a decrease of about 0.24 medals per game (net increase minus about 0.24), excluding the increase in the 2nd BB. In the carry-over state after winning, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB state (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when there is no determination target to be determined in step S308, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1BB prize, the 7th minor combination and the 1st When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established preferentially over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd replay, 3rd replay, and 2nd regame winning are set so that each replay winning has priority over the 2BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S314. In the game number update process, the number of remaining games in the portent mode, CZ mode, and AT mode is updated. The number-of-games update process will be described later in detail.

In subsequent step S315, the first section display process is executed, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information set in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop.

In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, a minor winning combination may be established, or none of the minor winning combinations may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in step S411, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that a minor win has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to tenth re-game wins has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "90" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the subsequent step S509, the first BB start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of the game, and is the number of bets that allows the reels 32L to 32R to start rotating by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the game can be started). number of possible bets). That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "90" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the second BB winning flag is cleared, and in step S513, the second BB status flag is set. After that, in step S514, the second BB start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed.

The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described later in detail.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

In the present embodiment, the BB counter (maximum payout number) is set to the same value when the 1st BB win is established and when the 2nd BB win is established, but these values may be different. For example, the value of the BB counter set when the first BB win is established may be made larger than that when the second BB win is established, or vice versa.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 24 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, since a lottery table is used in which the number of medals can be decreased in each game, even if the 1BB state or the 2BB state is completed, the number of medals held will not increase. Conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will be reduced by completing the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process using the lottery table for the BB state and control of each reel. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is not equal to or less than 0 in step S517, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB win is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, by notifying the operation order of winning the 1st minor role to winning the 6th minor role when the winning order of the bell is won, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning and the non-executing mode. The AT mode (non-navigation mode) can be switched, and it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 26, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the number of bets for the game to be started this time is ascertained, and it is determined whether or not the ascertained number of bets matches a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state at that time. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603.

As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. and if it is not the specified specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) after step S604.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the specific prescribed number of non-internal states and internal states is set to 3, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is executed in the 2-bet game. not. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific prescribed number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, but in each of these BB states, the prescribed bet number is set to 3. Therefore, the 2-bet game is No display mode processing is executed in the first BB state or the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if a 2-bet game is played in the internal state, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB state is carried over can be facilitated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is in the advantageous section, and is set when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and cleared when the game is shifted to the normal section. be done.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section shift lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As a trigger for the lottery to move to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, pushing order A bell and a watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous section transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If the transfer lottery is won in step S705, an advantageous zone winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S706. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 26), if the advantageous section flag is set in step S604, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag or the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

Here, in the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set in which the number of continuous AT mode games and the additional winning probability of the number of AT mode games are different. The first AT flag and the second AT flag are flags for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode is on and its type. Each of these AT flags is set at the time of transition to AT mode. If none of the AT flags are set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery process>
The AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. If the first AT flag is not set, that is, if the first AT mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S803 to determine whether the ceiling counter value provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0 or not. In the present embodiment, when the number of games in which the first AT mode transition lottery is not won (the number of addictive games) reaches a predetermined ceiling number of games (for example, 700 games) while staying in the advantageous section, It is configured to shift to the first AT mode regardless of the result of the 1AT mode shift lottery. The ceiling counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining until the number of ceiling games. or not.

If a negative determination is made in step S803 (if the value of the ceiling counter is not 0), the process advances to step S804 to determine whether the CZ flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. The CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode is in progress, and is set at the start of the CZ mode and cleared at the end of the CZ mode. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as states before winning the lottery for transition to AT mode in an advantageous section, and CZ mode shifts to AT mode rather than normal mode. It is set as a mode that makes it easy to win the transition lottery.

If the CZ flag is not set in step S804, that is, if the mode is the normal mode, in step S805, the normal first AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the normal first AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the first AT mode (the winning probability of the first AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, if the CZ flag is set in step S804, that is, if the CZ mode is selected, the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S806. Also in the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the first AT mode is set according to the lottery result of each game.

In the present embodiment, in both the normal first AT mode transition lottery table and the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, A chance item A, a chance item B, a chance item C, a cherry A, a cherry B, a cherry C, a common bell, a pushing order bell, and a watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all winning results are set as triggers for the 1st AT mode transition lottery. However, in the 1st AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the 1st AT mode transition rate when winning Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, Common Bell, Watermelon is normal It is higher than in the case of the first AT mode transition lottery table, and the transition rate to the first AT mode is preferentially treated.

The trigger for the first AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the first AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won. It may be configured such that only part of the results that can be won in the normal mode and the CZ mode as a 3-bet game are triggered.

After execution of step S805 or step S806, the process proceeds to step S807 to execute the first AT mode lottery process. In the first AT mode lottery process, a random number for the first AT mode transition lottery is obtained, and the obtained random number, the lottery result grasped in step S801, and the first AT mode transition lottery table obtained in step S805 or step S806 are used. A lottery for the first AT mode is performed. In the following step S808, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode lottery process in step S807 has won the transition to the first AT mode. If the game is won, the process for winning the first AT mode in steps S809 to S813 is executed, and if the game is not won, the process for non-winning in the first AT mode is executed in steps S814 to S819.

Here, the 1st AT mode is a mode in which a pressing order notification corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor combinations is generated when the pressing order bell is won, and is a mode in which a large increase in medals can be expected. When the 1st AT mode is shifted to the 1st AT mode and the pressing order notification is generated, it becomes possible to establish the 1st to 6th minor winning prizes at the time of winning each pressing order bell. In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of cards per game during the first AT mode is approximately plus 8.04 cards. In the first AT mode, the number of initial games is set to 15 games, and by winning the extra lottery, the number of remaining games is added. When the number of remaining games reaches 0, the first AT mode ends.

If the first AT mode transition lottery is won in step S808, then in step S809, the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is cleared (set to 0). In the following step S810, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-of-out counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is zero. Note that the role of the out-counter will be described later. If the value of the out-counter is not 0 in step S810, the value of the counter is cleared in step S811.

After execution of step S811 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S810 (when the value of the losing counter is 0), the first AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S812. The 1st AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the 1st AT mode winning state has been achieved. In subsequent step S813, the first AT winning command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process ends. The 1st AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the 1st AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If the determination in step S808 is negative (if the first AT mode is not won), the process proceeds to step S814 to determine whether or not the CZ flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. If the CZ flag is not set, that is, if the game is in the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S815. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, a transition rate to the CZ mode (probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell , Push order bell, Watermelon is set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all winning results are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery.

The trigger for the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when part of the chances are won. It may be configured such that only part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a game is a trigger role.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S815, a CZ mode lottery process is executed in step S816. In the CZ mode lottery process, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode is performed based on the obtained CZ mode transition lottery table and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . In step S817, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode lottery process in step S816 has won the transition to the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode transition lottery is won in step S817, the process advances to step S818 to set the CZ winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In step S819, a CZ winning command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process ends. The CZ winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 of winning the CZ mode transition lottery.

If an affirmative determination is made at step S814 (in the CZ mode) or a negative determination is made at step S817 (not winning the CZ mode shift lottery), this AT lottery process ends.

If the determination in step S802 is affirmative (if the first AT mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S820 to acquire the second AT mode transition lottery table from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, a lottery for transition to the second AT mode is performed only when staying in the first AT mode.

The second AT mode, like the first AT mode, is a mode in which, when the pressing order bell is won, notification of the pressing order corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor combinations is generated, and a large increase in medals can be expected. In both the 1st AT mode and the 2nd AT mode, a game number addition lottery is conducted to add the number of staying games, but the game number addition rate in the 2nd AT mode is more favorable than that in the 1st AT mode. . That is, the second AT mode is an AT mode higher than the first AT mode, in other words, the AT mode is more advantageous for the player than the first AT mode.

In the second AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the second AT mode (the winning probability of the second AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon are set as triggers for the second AT mode transition lottery. That is, in the game in the first AT mode as a 3-bet game that carries over the second BB, a part of the winning results is set as a trigger for the second AT mode transition lottery.

It should be noted that the trigger for the second AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which all winning results serve as triggers.

After acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table in step S820, the second AT mode lottery process is executed in step S21. In the second AT mode lottery process, a lottery for transition to the second AT mode is performed based on the obtained second AT mode transition lottery table and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . In step S822, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode lottery process in step S821 has been won.

If the second AT mode transition lottery is not won in step S822, this AT lottery processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the second AT mode transition lottery is won, the process advances to step S823 to set the second AT winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The 2nd AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the 2nd AT mode transition lottery has been won. In step S824, the second AT winning command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process ends. The second AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 of winning the second AT mode transition lottery.

<Processing for adding AT>
The AT addition processing in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when the AT flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition processing, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. In subsequent step S902, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the first AT mode.

When the 1st AT flag is set in step S902 (when the 1st AT mode is in progress), in step S903, the addition lottery table for the 1st AT is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. On the other hand, if the first AT flag is not set in step S902, it means that the second AT mode is in progress. In this case, the process proceeds to step S904 to acquire the second AT additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

In the additional lottery table for each AT mode, as shown in FIG. 31, an additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. Comparing the 1st AT add-on lottery table and the 2nd AT add-on lottery table, the add-on lottery using the 2nd AT add-on lottery table is more suitable for the add-on lottery than the add-on lottery using the 1st AT add-on lottery table. Easier to get elected. For example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table has a 15% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table has a 30% probability of winning. , and in the situation after shifting to the AT mode, the winning probability of the additional lottery is higher during the second AT mode than during the first AT mode.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S903 or step S904, the additional lottery process is executed in step S905. In the add-on lottery process, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games based on the above-obtained add-on lottery table for each AT mode and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the addition of the number of games has been won in the addition lottery process of step S905.

If the game number addition is not won, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of games to be added has been won, the process proceeds to step S907, and the number of games to be added lottery process is executed. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 31, the add-on game count table is set so that the add-on game count differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on game. For example, if an extra game is added in the wake of a normal reply B, an average of 100 games will be added, whereas if an extra game is added in the wake of a cherry A, an average of 15 games will be added. The number of additional games is set to be larger when the additional game is performed when it is difficult to win the lottery.

In step S908, a process of adding the current number of additional games selected by the additional game number lottery process of step S907 to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After execution of step S908, in step S909, the add command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT add process is terminated. The addition command includes information indicating that the number of games is to be added and the number of games to be added. The processing to be performed by the unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed.

<Rotation effect processing>
Here, the rotation effect processing of step S401 in the reel control processing (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32(a). In the present embodiment, by stopping a specific symbol combination in the display windows 26L to 26R corresponding to the reels 32L to 32R, the first AT mode winning is notified, and the rotation effect processing is for that purpose. .

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the CZ mode, as already explained. If the CZ flag is not set (if the CZ mode is not in progress), the rotation effect processing is terminated. If the CZ flag is set, the process advances to step S1002 to determine whether or not the first AT win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the 1st AT winning flag is not set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. When the 1st AT winning flag is set (when the 1st AT mode transition lottery is won), the 1st AT winning flag is cleared in step S1003, and then in step S1004, the various flag storage area 106d. , the first AT start flag is set. The first AT start flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode should be started.

After execution of step S1004, in step S1005, it sets so that rotation production for 1st AT information may be performed. As the first AT notification rotation effect, for example, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, as shown in FIG. 7” The pattern is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (lower right line L4), and then the rotation of the reels 32L to 32R is restarted. This first AT notification rotation effect is a effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode is a so-called pseudo-bonus.

In subsequent step S1006, the first AT notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the rotation effect processing is terminated. The first AT notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the winning of the first AT mode will be notified by the first AT notification rotation effect in the current game.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the game next to the game in which the 1st AT mode is won or in the game after the CZ mode is completed, the 1st AT mode by the 1st AT notification rotation effect using each reel 32L to 32R Successful candidates will be notified. At the same time, a flag for starting the first AT mode is set for starting the shift to the first AT mode, and the game shifts to the first AT mode from the game next to the announcement of winning. When the mode is shifted to the first AT mode, it becomes possible to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the press order bell wins.

Notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processing of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 26). That is, after the AT lottery process and the AT addition process are executed in the process of step S607 or step S608, the process of notifying the pressing order is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification process, an outline of the pressing order notification performed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing is possible is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game this time is that the pressing order of the bell has been won. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT flag or the second AT flag is set. If any of the AT flags is set, in step S611, the instruction monitor instructs that the pressing order notification corresponding to the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is performed according to the type of the current pressing order bell. 68. Then, in step S612, after setting the push order notification command including the information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins to be output to the display control device 81, the main push order is set. End the notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

If it is determined in step S609 that the bell is not won in the pressing order, or if none of the AT flags is set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for updating the number of games>
The process for updating the number of games in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number update process, a process of updating the number of remaining games up to the ceiling number of games, the number of remaining games in CZ mode, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. is executed.

In the game number update process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and the game to be started this time is in any BB state. It is determined whether or not there is If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1103. That is, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing.

If a negative determination is made in each of the processes in steps S1102 and S1103, this process for updating the number of games ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in these processes, the process advances to step S1104 to determine whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The advantageous section flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the advantageous section.

If the advantageous interval flag is not set (not in the advantageous interval), the game count updating process is terminated. If the advantageous section flag is set (in the advantageous section), the process advances to step S1105 to determine whether any AT win flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. The AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT transfer lottery has been won.

If none of the AT winning flags is set, it is determined in step S1106 whether any AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode. If none of the AT flags have been set, the flow advances to step S1107 to update the value of the ceiling counter provided in the counter area 106e of the RAM 106 by subtracting 1 from it.

In the subsequent step S1108, the values of the out-of-range counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are decremented by 1 and updated.

Now, the out-counter will be described. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that internal points can be awarded as the game progresses. The points are given through a grant lottery process consisting of a grant lottery to decide whether to grant points and a point number lottery to determine the number of points to be granted. When points are given, the points are not limited to one game, but accumulated. When the total points reach a privilege grant value (for example, 5 points), a predetermined privilege is granted to the player.

A point grant lottery is performed when an event undesirable to the player occurs, and with such a configuration, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated by awarding points. In the present embodiment, a plurality of triggers are provided as triggers for executing such a point grant lottery, and one of them is when the first AT mode transition lottery is not won while staying in an advantageous section. The number of games (the number of addictive games) reaches a specific number (for example, 600 games). The loss counter is for counting the number of remaining games up to a specific number. decremented by Note that the point award lottery and the privilege when the total points reach the privilege award value will be described later in detail.

After execution of step S1108, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the value of the outlier counter is zero. The fact that the value of the loss counter is 0 means that the number of games remaining until the specific number is 0, in other words, it means that the number of addictive games has reached the specific number. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1110, and the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag A is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the execution trigger for the point award lottery has been established. In step S1111, a point trigger command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The point opportunity command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a point award lottery execution opportunity (point award opportunity) has been established. In the present embodiment, a plurality of triggers are set as the trigger for giving points, and the point trigger command includes information indicating that the trigger for giving points has been established, and which trigger is the trigger for giving points this time. It contains information indicating whether

After the execution of step S1111, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1105 (if any AT winning flag is set) or if the negative determination is made in step S1109 (if the value of the counter is not 0), go to step S1112 Next, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ flag is a flag indicating that the CZ mode is on.

If the CZ flag is set (if the CZ mode is in progress), a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the CZ counter is executed in step S1113. Thereby, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is updated. In step S 1114 , a CZ game number update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . The CZ game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has been updated. After execution of step S1114 or when a negative determination is made in step S1112 (when not in the CZ mode), this process for updating the number of games ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106 (if the AT mode is in progress), a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter value is executed in step S1115. As a result, the number of remaining AT mode games is updated. In step S1116, an AT game count update command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this game count update process is terminated. The AT game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode remaining game count has been updated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
The winning result handling process of step S415 in the reel control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like is performed according to the game result of the game. This process is executed when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (when the game is over).

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1202. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1203. That is, the processing of steps S1201 to S1203 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing.

If an affirmative determination is made in steps S1202 and S1203, the process advances to step S1204 to execute CZ mode processing for starting or ending the CZ mode. In step S1205, first AT mode transition processing is executed to start the first AT mode, and in step S1206, first AT mode end processing is executed to end the first AT mode. In step S1207, second AT mode processing for starting the second AT mode or ending the second AT mode is executed. In step S1208, a first point lottery process for performing a point award lottery is executed. After execution of step S1208, if a negative determination is made in step S1202 or if a negative determination is made in step S1203, the winning result handling process is terminated.

<CZ mode processing>
The CZ mode processing in step S1204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ winning flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If the CZ winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1302 to clear the winning flag, and then in step S1303 the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. This initiates the CZ mode (transitions to the CZ mode).

In step S1304, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 games) as an initial value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one for each game. Note that the initial value of the CZ counter (the initial number of games in the CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games.

After step S1304 is executed, in step S1305, a CZ start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this CZ mode processing ends. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has been entered. The CZ start command includes information indicating the transition to the CZ mode and information indicating the initial number of games in the CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 can recognize that the game has been switched to the CZ mode and the number of games in the CZ mode.

If the determination in step S1301 is negative (if the CZ winning flag is not set), the process advances to step S1306 to determine whether the CZ flag is set in the flag storage area 106d, that is, the CZ mode. Determine whether or not If the CZ flag is set (in the CZ mode), it is determined in step S1307 whether the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0 or not.

When the value of the CZ counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0), the process advances to step S1308 to clear the CZ flag set in the various flag storage area 106d. This terminates the CZ mode. In step S 1309 , a CZ end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The CZ end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has ended.

After execution of step S1309, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The 1st AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the 1st AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the 1st AT winning flag is set, that is, if the 1st AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the process for the CZ mode is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the 1st AT winning flag is not set (when the 1st AT mode transition lottery is not won during the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1311, and the point lottery flag B is set in the various flag storage area 106d. do. The point lottery flag B is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the execution trigger for the point award lottery has been established. That is, in the present embodiment, although it was possible to shift to the CZ mode, the fact that the CZ mode ended without being able to win the first AT mode transition lottery is one of the triggers for executing the point grant lottery. I'm trying.

In the subsequent step S1312, a point trigger command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The point trigger command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the point award trigger has been established. After execution of step S1312, if a negative determination is made in step S1306 (if the CZ mode is not in progress) or if a negative determination is made in step S1307 (if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not 0), this CZ mode processing ends. .

<First AT Mode Shift Processing>
The processing for shifting to the first AT mode in step S1205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. If the CZ flag is not set (not in the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1402 to determine whether the first AT win flag or any AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d.

If the 1st AT winning flag is not set and none of the AT flags are set (there is neither a winning game in the 1st AT mode nor the AT mode), in step S1403 the various flag storage areas It is determined whether or not the first AT mode start flag is set in 106d. The first AT mode start flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode should be started.

If the flag for starting the first AT mode is set, the process advances to step S1404 to clear the flag for starting the first AT mode, and sets the first AT flag in the flag storage area 106d in step S1405. This starts the first AT mode (shifts to the first AT mode). In step S1406, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 15 games) as an initial value of an AT counter provided in various counter areas 106e of RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining AT mode games, and is decremented by one for each game. Note that the initial value of the AT counter (initial number of games in AT mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games.

In step S1407, the first AT start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The first AT start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the first AT mode has been entered. The first AT start command includes information indicating the transition to the first AT mode and information indicating the initial number of games in the first AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the first AT start command, the display control device 81 can recognize that the mode has been shifted to the first AT mode and the number of games in the first AT mode.

After execution of step S1407, if affirmative determination is made in step S1401 (if in CZ mode), if affirmative determination is made in step S1402 (first AT winning flag is set, or any AT flag is set If yes), and if a negative determination is made in step S1403 (if the first AT start flag is not set), this first AT mode transition processing ends.

<Processing for ending the first AT mode>
The processing for ending the first AT mode in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. If the first AT flag is not set (if the first AT mode is not in progress), the first AT mode ending process is terminated. If the first AT flag is set (in the first AT mode), the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the AT counter value provided in the counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is zero. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the first AT mode is 1 or more, the process for ending the first AT mode is terminated as it is so as to continue the first AT mode. On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the first AT mode is 0), the process advances to step S1503 to clear the first AT flag set in the flag storage area 106d. This ends the first AT mode.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the second AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The 2nd AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the 2nd AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the 2nd AT winning flag is set, that is, if the 2nd AT mode transition lottery is won during the 1st AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1505 to clear the 2nd AT winning flag. In step S1506, the flag for starting the second AT is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the process for ending the first AT mode ends. The second AT start flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second AT mode should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504 (if the 2nd AT winning flag is not set), that is, if the 1st AT mode ends without winning the 2nd AT mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1507, and various counters in the RAM 106 It is determined whether or not the value of the PT counter provided in area 106e is 5 or more. As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the total points reach the privilege giving value (for example, 5 points), a privilege is given to the player. It determines whether or not the points have reached the privilege grant value.

If the PT counter value is 5 or more and the total points have reached the privilege grant value, the process advances to step S1508 to clear the PT counter value to zero. In step S1509, a point achievement command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The point achievement command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the total points have reached the privilege grant value. After execution of step S1509, the process advances to step S1506 to set the second AT start flag in the various flag storage area 106d.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery for the transition to the second AT mode is not won during the first AT mode, if the total points reach the privilege award value, the transition to the second AT mode is made after the first AT mode ends. This is a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value. It should be noted that there is a case where the lottery for shifting to the second AT mode is won during the first AT mode when the total points have reached the privilege award value. In that case, the transition to the second AT mode is performed without consuming the total points, and the total points are carried over to the first AT mode after the next time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507 (the value of the PT counter is less than 5), the process advances to step S1510 to set the first AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT mode has ended. In step S1511, the first AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The first AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1512, the point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag C is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the trigger for executing the point award lottery has been established. That is, in the present embodiment, the fact that the first AT mode has been successfully shifted to the first AT mode but the first AT mode has ended without winning the second AT mode transition lottery is used as a trigger for executing the point grant lottery. is one of In the following step S1513, a point trigger command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the first AT mode termination processing is terminated.

<Second AT Mode Processing>
The second AT mode processing in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in steps S1601 and S1602, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag or the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. If any of these flags is set (either during the CZ mode or during the first AT mode), the process for the second AT mode ends. On the other hand, if neither the CZ flag nor the first AT flag is set (neither in the CZ mode nor in the first AT mode), the flow advances to step S1603 to store the second AT flag in the flag storage area 106d. is set.

If the second AT flag is not set, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the second AT start flag is not set, the process for the second AT mode ends. On the other hand, if the second AT start flag is set, the flow advances to step S1605 to clear the second AT start flag, and at step S1606 the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Thereby, the second AT mode is started (transition to the second AT mode).

In step S1607, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 40 games) as an initial value of the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. Note that the initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode (initial number of AT mode games) does not necessarily have to be greater than the initial value of the AT counter in the first AT mode. A value smaller than the initial value may be used. Also, the initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games.

Next, in step S1608, a second AT start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the process for the second AT mode ends. The second AT start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the second AT mode has been entered. The second AT start command includes information indicating the transition to the second AT mode and information indicating the initial number of games in the second AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the second AT start command, the display control device 81 can recognize that the game has been switched to the second AT mode and the number of games in the second AT mode.

If the determination in step S1603 is affirmative (if the second AT flag is set), the process advances to step S1609 to determine whether or not the AT counter value provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. . If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the second AT mode is 1 or more, the process for the second AT mode is terminated as it is so as to continue the second AT mode. On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the second AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1610 to clear the second AT flag set in the various flag storage area 106d. This ends the second AT mode.

In step S1611, the second AT end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second AT mode has ended. In step S1612, the second AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the process for the second AT mode is ended. The second AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the second AT mode has ended.

<First point lottery process>
The first point lottery process in step S1208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether any AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. If none of the AT flags are set and the AT mode is not set, the process advances to step S1702 to determine whether or not the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag A is set when the value of the loss counter becomes 0 and the number of addictive games (the number of games played without winning the first AT mode transition lottery) reaches a specific number (for example, 600 games). It is set assuming that the opportunity to execute the grant lottery has been established (step S1110 in FIG. 35).

If the point lottery flag A is set, the process advances to step S1703 to acquire the point lottery table A from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the point lottery table A, as shown in FIG. 42, the award probability is set for each point number from 0 to 5. In FIG. The probability of giving each point is 90%, which is the highest. At 10% of points awarded, the probability of awarding 5 points, which is the highest point, is the highest, and the probability of awarding decreases as the number of points decreases. That is, in the point lottery table A, the probability of points being awarded is low, but when points are awarded, a large number of points is likely to be awarded.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702 (if the point lottery flag A is not set), the flow advances to step S1704 to determine whether or not the point lottery flag B is set in the flag storage area 106d. . The point lottery flag B is set when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, assuming that the opportunity to execute the point award lottery has been established (step S1311 in FIG. 37).

If the point lottery flag B is set, the process advances to step S1705 to acquire the point lottery table B from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the probability of awarding each point number in the point lottery table B is such that the probability that the number of points is 0 (no points are awarded) is 50%, and the point award rate is higher than that of the point lottery table A. is also higher. On the other hand, when points are awarded, the probability of awarding 1 point, which is the lowest value, is the highest, and the probability of awarding decreases as the number of points increases. That is, in the point lottery table B, although the probability of points being awarded is high, when points are awarded, a small number of points is likely to be awarded.

If the determination in step S1704 is negative (if the point lottery flag B is not set), the process advances to step S1706 to determine whether or not the point lottery flag C is set in the flag storage area 106d. . The point lottery flag C is set when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, assuming that the opportunity to execute the point award lottery has been established (step S1512 in FIG. 39).

If the point lottery flag C is set, the process advances to step S1707 to acquire the point lottery table C from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the probabilities of giving each number of points in the point lottery table C are the same as in the point lottery table B. As shown in FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1706 (if the point lottery flag C is not set), that is, if the point lottery trigger has not been established, the first point lottery process is terminated.

After step S1703, step S1705, or step S1707 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1708 to execute a point grant lottery process. In the point giving lottery process, lottery for the number of points is performed based on the acquired point lottery table and lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not the award of points has been won in the grant lottery process of step S1708 (whether or not the number of points to be granted is 1 or more).

If no points have been awarded (if the number of points drawn is 0), the process for the first point drawing ends as it is. If the player wins the award of points, in step S1710, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of points awarded in the present grant lottery to the PT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The PT counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of accumulated points (total number of points). In step S1711, a point giving command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The point giving command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that points have been given. The point giving command includes information indicating that points have been given, as well as information indicating the number of points given in this giving lottery and the total number of points. Therefore, by receiving the point giving command, the display control device 81 can grasp not only that points have been given, but also the number of points that have been given and the total number of accumulated points.

After execution of step S1711, the first point lottery processing is terminated. Also, if the determination in step S1701 is affirmative (if any AT flag is set and the AT mode is in progress), the first point lottery processing is also terminated. That is, when the AT mode is in progress, no point grant lottery (point grant) is performed.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S315 in the lottery process (FIG. 18), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the advantageous section winning game flag is cleared in step S1804. Then, in step S1805, the advantageous section flag is set. As a result, the advantageous section starts (shifts to the advantageous section).

In step S1806, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section.

In step S1807, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games (for example, a value corresponding to 700 games) as an initial value of ceiling counters provided in various counter areas 106e of RAM 106 is executed. In step S1808, a process of inputting a predetermined value (e.g., a value corresponding to 600 games) as an initial value of the loss counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Run. In the present embodiment, the start of the advantageous section is one of the execution triggers for the point award lottery, and the processing in step S1809 corresponds to the point award lottery based on establishment of the execution trigger.

Here, the second point lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second point lottery process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether any AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. If none of the AT flags are set and the AT mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S1902 to set the point trigger command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 .

In subsequent step S1903, the point lottery table D is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the probability of awarding each point number in the point lottery table D is such that the probability of the number of points being 0 (no points being awarded) is 30%, and the probability of points being awarded is 30%. It is higher than the point lottery table. In addition, when points are awarded, the number of points is distributed such that a smaller number of points is more likely to be awarded than a larger number of points.

Note that the point lottery tables A to D in the present embodiment are merely examples, and the point grant probability and the distribution of the number of points can be set arbitrarily. In addition, although it is configured to use a separate lottery table corresponding to the establishment of each opportunity, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a common lottery table corresponding to all opportunities is provided (probability of awarding points and number of points It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distribution rate does not differ for each opportunity.

After executing step S1903, the processing of steps S1905 to S1907 is executed, which are the same as steps S1708 to S1711 in the first point lottery processing (FIG. 41). That is, lottery for the number of points is performed based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and when points are awarded, the current number of points will be reduced from the previous number. Add to points.

Returning to the description of the first section display process (FIG. 43), after executing the second point lottery process in step S1809, in step S1810, an advantageous section start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The advantageous interval start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that an advantageous interval will start.

After execution of step S1810, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802 (in the advantageous section) or a negative determination is made in step S1803 (if the advantageous section winning game flag is not set), step S1811 is executed. , AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the display of the section indicator are met. If any of the AT mode flags are set, then in step S1812, the display of the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8.

After the display of the section display is started in this way, if the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed in step S1801, the flow advances to step S1813 to display the advantageous section. Continue processing. Specifically, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1811, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1814, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Also, after executing the process of step S1812 or step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1815. In step S1815, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1814 or step S1815, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1816. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1817, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1816 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77A, a second display section 77B, a third display section 77C, a fourth display section 77D, and a fifth display section 77E as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display section 77A to the fifth display section 77E, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, have individual light sources composed of LEDs, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1817, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1816 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77A to 77E in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1817, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1816. In addition, since the first display portion 77A of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77A is not provided, or the first display portion 77A is printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77A and the second display portion 77B.

<Second section display processing>
The section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the second section display process is a process executed in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 21), and at the end of one game, medals are paid out (payout determination process) and based on the winning result. It is executed after the transition of the game state, etc. (process corresponding to the winning result) is performed.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S2102, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S2102, in step S2103, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S2103, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S2103, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S2104, and the remaining game number management process is executed in subsequent step S2105.

The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the number-of-remaining-games management process, for example, the sum of the number of advantageous section games AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in AT mode), and the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in CZ mode) is calculated. , grasps whether the number of games is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or is greater than the upper limit number of games. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation.

The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. . In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the subsequent step S2106, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous interval games MY has reached 2400 or more as the upper limit increase. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S2107. In the following step S2108, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed.

In step S2109, processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed. In the advantageous section information initialization processing, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are returned to their initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT winning flag, the AT flag, various CZ flags, etc. are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games AG in the advantageous section, the number of increased/decreased number of games in the advantageous section MY, the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to zero. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for these variables or parameters.

In the initialization process of step S2109, a process of clearing a flag related to the point grant lottery process and a counter related to the awarded points is also performed. Specifically, if any of the point lottery flags are set, those flags are cleared, and if the value of the PT counter (counter for grasping the total number of points) is greater than 0, that Perform processing to clear the value to 0 (processing to initialize the total points).

In step S 2110 , the advantageous section end command and the initialization command are set as output targets to the display control device 81 . The advantageous section end command is a command for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the initialization command is a command for notifying that initialization processing has been performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106 (if the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S2111, and any AT Determine whether the end flag is set. The AT end flag is set at the end of each AT mode (step S1510 in FIG. 39, step S1611 in FIG. 40).

If the AT end flag is set, the AT end flag is cleared in step S2112. After that, the process proceeds to step S2107, and the processing of steps S2107 to S2110 is executed to end the advantageous section. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode that has shifted to the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2111 (no AT end flag is set), the section display second process is terminated.

In the section display second process, the number of bets corresponds to the gaming state, as in steps S601 to S603 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 26) and steps S1101 to S1103 of the game number update process (FIG. 35). It does not execute the process of determining whether or not the Therefore, the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the number of increased/decreased number of the advantageous section MY (the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section minus the number of inserted medals in the advantageous section) are calculated based on the number of games played. It is updated each time the game is executed, regardless of the number of bets at that time. In other words, even if the game is played with the number of bets set to 2 (when the game is played with the number of bets not matching the specified number), executed.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 46, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, when winning the lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning the 7th minor winning combination 7 (common bell), etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the next game of the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established measurement (counting of the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT flag are set, etc., and the state where the pressing order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is satisfied. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can figure out the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is completed in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the pushing order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the pushing order notification is illegally received even though it is not in the advantageous section. Thus, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

<About production related to points>
As already described, in the present embodiment, when a point giving lottery execution opportunity is established as the game progresses, the point giving lottery is executed. When the point giving lottery is won, points are given and the given points are accumulated. Then, when the total value of the given points (total points) reaches the privilege given value, the player is given a privilege (transition to the second AT mode). In this case, if an effect (announcement) is performed to suggest the total points each time in the process until the total points reach the privilege award value, the player will have the impression that the points are accumulated, and the bonus award value will be reached. Since it is possible to predict the remaining number of points, the motivation to further increase the points is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in a configuration in which the value of the PT counter is cleared to 0 at the end of the advantageous section, and the points accumulated up to that point are lost, if this is directly reflected in the performance, the motivation to continue the game by giving points will be lost. remains in the advantageous section, and there is a risk that it will not be successfully aroused after the advantageous section ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect is devised so that the desire to continue playing the game is favorably aroused by giving points even after the end of the advantageous section. A specific configuration for that purpose will be described below.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main controller 101 or not. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in RAM 183 is executed in step S2202. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after the processing of step S2202 has been executed, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, such as a bet command set in step S206 of the normal processing (FIG. 17). If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S2204, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process of step S2204 has been executed, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The start time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process (FIG. 18). , a CZ winning command, an AT winning command, an addition command set in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 26), and a point giving command set in the second point lottery process (FIGS. 43 and 44). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2206.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or if the process of step S2206 has been executed, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. There is a stop command command that is set by In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2208, each stop operation time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, or after the process of step S2208 is executed, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S418 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). In addition to commands, CZ start command, CZ end command, AT start command, AT end command set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 36), and set in the first point lottery process (Fig. 36, Fig. 41) and a point achievement command set in the process for ending the first AT mode (FIGS. 36 and 39). In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2210.

When a negative determination is made in step S2209, or after the processing of step S2210 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2211, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2211, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S2211, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, when starting, and when stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) are set, and without the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The start effect setting process in step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, the process proceeds to step S2303, and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. settings.

In step S2301, if the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning the special role. The specific combination is a lottery result called a rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. And watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be more likely to win than the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the lottery results other than the specific role.

If the lottery result of the game this time is that the special combination is won, the process for informing the special combination is executed in step S2305. In the process for informing the special combination, settings are made so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 perform a chance effect suggesting that the lottery result of the current game is one of the special combinations. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 53(c), for example, characters "Chance!!" Make them correspond and display them respectively.

After the execution of steps S2303 and S2305, if a negative determination is made in step S2302 (if the push order notification command has not been received) or if a negative determination is made in step S2304 (if a specific combination is not won), in step S2306, It is determined whether or not the first AT notification command (step S1006 in FIG. 32(a)) has been received as the current start time command. When the first AT notification command is received, in step S2307, a pseudo-bonus winning effect for notifying that the first AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. settings. In the pseudo-bonus effect, as shown in FIG. 53(d), for example, "V!!777" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and a voice congratulating the winner of the pseudo-bonus (first AT mode) is played. to be output.

After execution of step S2307 or if a negative determination is made in step S2306 (if the first AT notification command has not been received), in step S2308, whether or not the second AT winning command has been received as the command at the start of this time judge. When the 2nd AT winning command is received, in step S2309, a promotion winning effect for notifying that the 2nd AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Run the settings.

After execution of step S2309 or if a negative determination is made in step S2308 (when the second AT winning command is not received), in step S2310, the advantageous section start command (step S1810 in FIG. 43) as the command at the start of this time Determine whether or not it is received. If the advantageous interval start command has been received, the advantageous interval flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2311. This advantageous section flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that it is in the advantageous section.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not a point giving command (step S1907 in FIG. 44) has been received as the command at the start of this time. As already explained, in the present embodiment, the main controller 101 is configured to perform a point award lottery at the start of the advantageous section, and this step determines whether or not points have been awarded in the point award lottery. is determined. If a point award command has been received, that is, if points have been awarded in the grant lottery, in step S2313, the points accumulated on the main controller 101 side are transferred to the CPU 181 (display control device 81 side). Execute point processing for managing with. The details of the point processing will be described later.

After execution of step S2313, if a negative determination is made in step S2310 (if the command to start the advantageous section has not been received) or if a negative determination is made in step S2312 (if a command to give points has not been received), in step S2314 Executes point effect execution processing. The point effect execution processing is for executing a point-related effect, and the processing for the above execution is performed based on the processing results of the point processing such as step S2313 and step S2405 described later (FIG. 49). It is. The details of the point effect execution processing will be described later.

Next, in step S2315, another start-time effect setting process is executed, and then the present start-time effect setting process is terminated. In step S2315, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is performed. .

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The all-stop effect setting process in step S2210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the CZ start command (step S1305 in FIG. 37) has been received as the current all stop command. When the CZ start command has been received, in step S2402, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ start effect is performed in the next game. In the CZ start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(a), characters such as "CZ mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify that the CZ mode is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401 (if the CZ start command has not been received), then in step S2403 it is determined whether or not the CZ end command (step S1309 in FIG. 37) has been received as the current all-stop command. judge. If the CZ end command has been received, the process advances to step S2404 to determine whether or not the point grant command (step S1711 in FIG. 41) has been received as the current all stop command. As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, the main controller 101 is configured to perform a point grant lottery. It is determined whether or not points have been given in the point giving lottery. If a point award command has been received, that is, if points have been awarded in the grant lottery, the process for points is executed in step S2405. This processing is similar to the point processing (FIG. 48) in step S2313.

After execution of step S2405 or when a negative determination is made in step S2404 (when the point giving command is not received), in step S2406, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the CZ end effect is performed in the current game. do. In the CZ end presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(b), characters such as "CZ mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify that the CZ mode has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 (if the CZ end command has not been received), in step S2407, the first AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 38) or the second AT start command ( It is determined whether or not step S1608) of FIG. 40 has been received. When these commands are received, in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the corresponding AT start effect is performed in the next game. In the first AT start effect (pseudo-bonus start effect), for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), characters such as "BONUS START" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to notify that the pseudo-bonus will start. . Further, in the second AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters such as "Rush into the RUSH!!" to notify that the AT mode will start.

If a negative determination is made in step S2407 (if the AT start command has not been received), it is determined in step S2409 whether the first AT end command (step S1511 in FIG. 39) has been received as the current command for all stop judge. If the first AT end command has been received, the process advances to step S2410 to determine whether or not the point achievement command (step S1509 in FIG. 39) has been received. The point achievement command indicates that the total points stored in the RAM 106 of the main controller 101 have reached the privilege grant value. to run. The release process is a process for executing a point release effect in accordance with awarding of a privilege (shifting to the second AT mode) based on reaching the privilege award value. The details of the point release effect will be described later.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2410 (if the point achievement command has not been received), the flow advances to step S2412 to determine whether the point award command (step S1711 in FIG. 41) has been received as the current all-stop command. determine whether or not As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the main controller 101 is configured to perform the point giving lottery, and this step is performed. , determines whether or not points have been awarded in the point grant lottery. If the point giving command has been received, the point processing is executed in step S2413.

After execution of step S2413 or when a negative determination is made in step S2412 (when no point giving command is received), in step S2414 the first AT mode end effect (pseudo bonus end effect) is performed in the current game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In the first AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in addition to the character display such as "BONUS END" on the auxiliary display section 65 to notify that the pseudo-bonus has ended, Characters are displayed to notify the achievements such as the number of medals earned.

If a negative determination is made in step S2409 (if the 1st AT end command has not been received), the process advances to step S2415 to see if the 2nd AT end command (step S1612 in FIG. 40) has been received as the current command for all stop. determine whether or not When the second AT end command is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the second AT mode end effect (RUSH end effect) is performed in the current game in step S2416. In the second AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(d), "RUSH
END" to notify that the second AT mode has ended, as well as character display to notify the results such as the continuous game of the AT mode and the total number of medals obtained in the first AT mode and the second AT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (if the second AT end command has not been received), in step S2417 it is determined whether or not a point grant command (step S1711 in FIG. 41) has been received as the current command for all stops. judge. As already explained, in the present embodiment, when 600 games have been played without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, main controller 101 is configured to perform a point grant lottery. It is determined whether or not points have been given in the point giving lottery. If a point giving command has been received, then in step S2418 a point-giving process is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2417 (if a point giving command has not been received), it is determined in step S2419 whether or not an initialization command (step S2110 in FIG. 45) has been received as the current all-stop command. do. If the initialization command has been received, in step S2420, a process of erasing the accumulated point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. Accumulated points correspond to the total points managed by the main controller 101, and specifically indicate the same value as the total points. In other words, it is for the CPU 181 to grasp the accumulated points on the display control device 81 side. In the present embodiment, information on retention points is stored in RAM 183 separately from accumulated points for management. Hold without. Details of the retention points will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2419 (if the initialization command has not been received), it is determined in step S2421 whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received as the current all-stop command. do. If these commands have been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled in step S2422 so that a bonus ending effect is performed in the current game.

After executing the processing of step S2402, step S2406, step S2408, step S2411, step S2414, step S2416, step S2418, step S2420 or step S2422, or if a negative determination is made in step S2421, another After setting the effect at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2423, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

<Point processing>
The processing for points in steps S2313, S2405, S2413, and S2418 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, based on the point award command received from main controller 101, the total points (the number of points accumulated on the main controller 101 side) are specified, and accumulated points are grasped. Although different names are used for distinction, total points and accumulated points indicate the same information. In step S2602, processing for updating accumulated points is executed. Specifically, the accumulated points (previous accumulated points) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are rewritten with the current accumulated points ascertained in step S2601.

In step S2603, a process of reading and grasping the holding points stored in the point information storage area 183d is executed. The retained points indicate the maximum accumulated points (total points) during the period from when the points were set to the initial value (0) until the present. As already explained, the total points are reset to the initial value (0) each time an advantageous section ends, while the retained points indicate the highest number of total points obtained in each advantageous section. ing. For example, if the total points in the advantageous section before the last is 3 points, the total points in the previous advantageous section is 1 point, and the total points up to now in the advantageous section this time are 2 points, the retained points are 3 points.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of accumulated points ascertained in step S2601 is greater than the value of retained points ascertained in step S2603. If the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points, the point processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the accumulated points are greater than the held points, that is, if accumulated points greater than the highest value up to that point have been grasped, the flow advances to step S2605 to execute processing for updating the held points. Specifically, the stored points stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are rewritten with the accumulated points grasped in step S2601.

In step S2606, a lottery process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a point-suggesting effect is performed. In the effect execution lottery process, a point suggesting effect execution lottery is carried out based on a lottery counter acquired from various counter areas 183b of a RAM 183 and a lottery table for sorting presence/absence of a point suggesting effect. The point suggesting effect suggests the accumulated points (total points) at that point in time, the details of which will be described later. The winning probability in the execution lottery is not particularly limited, and can be set arbitrarily. is set so that the probability of actual winning is higher than the probability of non-winning.

In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the execution of the point suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S2606. If the player wins, the process advances to step S2608 to set a suggestion effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The suggesting effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point suggesting effect should be executed. After execution of step S2608 or when a negative determination is made in step S2607 (when execution of the point suggesting effect is not won), this processing for points ends.

<Release treatment>
The release processing in step S2411 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50(b).

First, in step S2701, processing for clearing (initializing) accumulated points is executed. Specifically, the value of accumulated points stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is changed to the initial value (0), or the information on the points is erased. In step S2702, the value of the retained point stored in the point information storage area 183d is changed to the initial value, or the point information is erased to clear (initialize) the retained point. That is, the retained points are initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when the privilege based on reaching the privilege grant value is granted, and are maintained until the next reaching. retained.

Next, in step S2703, a release effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and then the present release processing is terminated. The release effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point release effect should be executed. The details of the point release effect will be described later.

<Process for executing point effect>
The point effect execution processing of step S2314 (FIG. 48) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the suggested effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. When the suggestive effect flag is set, that is, when the situation is such that the point suggestive effect should be executed, the suggestive effect flag is cleared in step S2802, and then in step S2803, various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 are stored. Acquire the type lottery table from.

Here, the point suggestion effect will be described. In addition to giving points, the point-suggesting effect notifies the accumulated points (total points) accumulated at that time. At that time, the notification of accumulated accumulated points does not clearly indicate the number of points or the like, but merely suggests the animation image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

In the point suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of bubble images are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and their sizes suggest the degree of accumulated points. These bubble images are displayed so as to rise from the bottom to the top of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 when the game is started (when the start lever 41 is operated). A predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 64 when it is played. In the present embodiment, as the types (modes) of point suggestion effects, small bubble effect (FIG. 55(a)), medium bubble effect (FIG. 55(b)), large bubble effect (FIG. 55(c)) and bubble There are four types of oversized effects (FIG. 55(d)).

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the small bubble effect, a very small size bubble image 201 and a small size bubble image 202 are displayed, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is small. there is As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the in-bubble effect, a small-sized bubble image 202 and a medium-sized bubble image 203 are displayed, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is moderate. It has become. As shown in FIG. 55(c), in the large bubble effect, a medium-sized bubble image 203 and a large-sized bubble image 204 are displayed. It suggests that it is very small. As shown in FIG. 55(d), in the extra-large bubble effect, an extra-large bubble image 205 larger than the bubble image 204 is displayed, suggesting that the accumulated points have reached a specific given value. It's becoming

The suggestion effect table acquired in step S2803 is for drawing lots to determine which one of the bubble effects is to be executed. In the type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 52, the number of retained points at that time and the selection probability of each bubble effect are set. It's becoming As an example, when the retention point is 1 point, either no effect (no execution of point suggestion effect) or small bubble effect is selected, and at that time, small bubble effect is selected rather than no effect. It's getting easier.

Note that the point-suggesting effect is not limited to the bubble effect, and may be one using other animations or still images. Also, the number of types is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or may be five or more.

After execution of step S2803, in step S2804, a type lottery for lottery for the type of point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, a lottery is made for the type of point suggesting effect based on the above-obtained type lottery table, the retained points updated in step S2605 of FIG. Execute the process. At this time, since the retained points and accumulated points have the same value, the lottery process in this step is performed based on the type lottery table, the accumulated points at that point, and the lottery counter. can also

At step S2805, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the point suggestion effect of the type selected at step S2804 is executed. In subsequent step S2806, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled based on the set effect data so that the lottery point suggestion effect is executed. After execution of step S2806, this point suggestion effect execution processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the point suggestion effect is executed at the start of the game. In this case, it may be configured to be executed when the game ends (when the final stop operation is performed). In these cases, the display control device 81 reads out the effect data at the corresponding timing in other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47), and responds so that the effect is performed with the read data. to control the reporting means.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801 (when the suggestion effect flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S2807 to determine whether or not the release effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. When the release effect flag is set, that is, when the point release effect should be executed, the release effect flag is cleared in step S2808, and then in step S2809, effect data for executing the point release effect set.

The point release presentation notifies that accumulated points (total points) have reached a privilege grant value, and that accumulated points have been released and a privilege has been granted. In the present embodiment, the privilege is the transition to the second AT mode, and the timing of the transition (timing of giving the privilege) is the end of the first AT mode. Based on this, the point giving effect is configured as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the auxiliary display section 65 informs the player of the end of the first AT mode in order to make it appear to the player that the first AT mode has ended. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(b), a large number of bubble images 205 (extra-large bubble images) are displayed so as to rise from the bottom of the display screen. obscured so as to be invisible or difficult to see. Then, when all the bubble images 205 disappear above the display screen, the second AT mode start notification appears as shown in FIG. 56(c), thereby notifying the transition to the second AT mode.

Note that the aspect of the point release effect is not limited to the above, and other aspects may be used as long as the player can recognize that the privilege has been granted based on reaching the privilege award value. good too.

In subsequent step S2810, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that the point release effect is executed based on the set effect data. In the present embodiment, the point release effect is executed at the start of the game. In this case, it may be configured to be executed when the game ends (when the final stop operation is performed). After execution of step S2810 or when a negative determination is made in step S2807 (when the release effect flag is not set), this point suggestion effect execution processing is terminated.

<Flow of Point Suggestion Production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the first advantageous section A is started with the total points (accumulated points) being 0 points. In addition, in the production execution lottery (lottery for whether or not to execute the point suggesting production) when points are awarded, all of them win, and the production type at that time is the one with the higher selection probability. and

After the advantageous section A is started at the timing t1, when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode shift lottery at the timing t2 and the execution trigger of the point giving lottery is established, the point giving lottery is executed. At that time, if 1 point is given, the total points are updated to 1 point in the main controller 101 (step S1710 in FIG. 41), and the held points are updated to 1 point in the display control device 81 (FIG. 41). 50(a) step S2605).

Also, at timing t2, a type lottery is executed for drawing lots for the type of point suggesting effect in accordance with the award of the points. In this case, since the holding point is 1 point, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the mode of the point suggesting effect is no effect or a small bubble effect (FIG. 52). As a result, if the small bubble effect is selected as the point suggestion effect, the small bubble effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 or the like as shown in FIG. 57(a). This suggests that points have been awarded and that the total number of points at that time is still small. Note that the point-suggesting effect ends when all the bubble images pass through the display screen, and the period is set shorter than the period of one game. That is, the point suggesting effect is started at the start of the game, and then ends in the middle of the game.

After that, when the number of addictive games reaches 600 at timing t3, which is the timing in the middle of the advantageous section A, and the execution trigger of the point award lottery is established, the award lottery is executed again. Assuming that 2 points are given by the grant lottery, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main controller 101 . At this time, in the display control device 81, based on the fact that the accumulated points (3 points) at that point in time are greater than the retained points (1 point), the retained points are updated to 3 points (see FIG. 50A). Steps S2601 to S2605).

Moreover, at the timing t3, a type lottery is executed as points are awarded. In this case, the number of points given is 2 points, but the type lottery is executed based on the number of points (3 points) on the retained point side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57(b), an in-bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. This suggests that points have been awarded and that the total number of points at that time is moderate, in other words, that the accumulated points have increased.

At timing t4, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section A ends. Along with this, initialization processing (step S2109 in FIG. 45) is executed in main controller 101, and the value of the total points is set to the initial value (0). At this time, the accumulated points are set to the initial value (0) in the display control device 81 as well, but the retained points are not initialized and the value (3) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as is.

When a new advantageous section B starts at timing t5, the main controller 101 executes a point grant lottery (step S1904 in FIG. 44). Assuming that one point is given in the lottery, the total points are updated to one point in the main controller 101 . At that time, the display control device 81 compares the accumulated points (1 point) and the retained points (3 points) at that time, but since the value of the accumulated points does not exceed the retained points, the retained points are updated. 3 points will remain. Also, based on the fact that the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points, execution of the point suggesting effect is restricted and the point suggesting effect is not executed (step S2604 in FIG. 50(a)). That is, the suggestion effect corresponding to the fact that the accumulated points (total points) is 1 point is not executed.

In the above case, after the total points are initialized, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted at the first execution trigger, but the current accumulated points are less than the holding points (in other words, Considering that the situation where the execution of the point suggestion effect should be restricted starts with the initialization of the total points, the limit state of the performance execution starts when the total points are initialized. can also

At timing t6, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section B ends and the total points are set to the initial value. Even if 1 point is awarded in the grant lottery just before that, and the total points (accumulated points) become 2 points, the accumulated points at that time are still smaller than the retained points, so the retained points are not updated and the points are not renewed. Suggestion production is also not executed. In other words, the execution limit of the point suggestion effect is maintained.

After the advantageous section C starts at timing t7, if the point award lottery is triggered at timing t8 and 4 points are awarded, main controller 101 makes the total points 4 points. Accordingly, the accumulated points on the display control device 81 side become larger than the held points (3 points) at that time, so the held points are updated to 4 points.

Further, at timing t8, based on the fact that the accumulated points have become larger than the held points, the restriction on execution of the point suggesting effect is lifted, and the type lottery is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57(c), it is suggested that a large bubble effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 and the like, points are given, and the total number of points at that time is increased. . At this time, the change in the actual total points is that once it is initialized and becomes 0 points, it increases to 4 points in one grant lottery, but points are suggested while the accumulated points are less than the holding points. Since the effect is not executed, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the total points have increased from the value suggested in the previous point suggesting effect (timing t3).

At timing t9, the point award lottery is triggered again, and if one point is awarded, the total points are updated to 5 points in the main controller 101, and the retained points are updated to 5 points in the display control device 81. be. Also, at timing t9, a type lottery corresponding to the holding point of 5 points is executed, and as shown in FIG. This suggests that the total points have reached the award value.

When the first AT mode ends at timing t10 and a privilege giving opportunity arrives, a privilege (transition to the second AT mode) is given. Along with this, the total points are initialized in the main controller 101 (step S1508 in FIG. 39), and the retained points are initialized in the display controller 81 (step S2702 in FIG. 50(b)). At this time, a point release effect (FIG. 56) is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and the award of a privilege based on reaching the privilege award value is notified.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, points are awarded upon satisfaction of the granting condition, and when the total value (total points) reaches the privilege grant value, a privilege (transition to the second AT mode) is granted to the player. By performing notification corresponding to the total points each time, the player can recognize that the total points are increasing toward the privilege grant value, and the desire to further increase the points is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game. However, in a configuration in which the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section and the points accumulated up to that point are lost, if the initialization of the total points is reflected in the notification as it is, it is difficult to re-accumulate from the beginning. There is a concern that the player will be given the impression that the game is being played, and the player will be less motivated to continue playing the game.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the total points are initialized by the main controller 101, the display control device 81 does not initialize the retention points stored in the RAM 183, but retains them. , the holding points are referred to and the execution control of the point suggesting effect is performed. With such a configuration, the execution control can be performed while taking into account the total points before the initialization when the point suggestion effect is performed after the total points are initialized, and the initialization of the total points can be directly used as the suggestion effect. It can be suppressed to be reflected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player the impression of re-saving, and to prevent a decrease in motivation to continue playing the game.

A configuration for controlling whether or not to execute the point suggesting effect based on the current total points (accumulated points) and the held retained points, and restricting the execution of the point suggesting effect when the current total points are equal to or less than the retained points. did.

According to the above configuration, execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted in a situation where the current total points are greater than the held points, while execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted in a situation where the current total points are equal to or less than the held points. In other words, the point suggestion effect is performed in a state where the point suggestion effect for each point award that notifies the value below the holding point is thinned out, so the total points actually decrease due to the effect of initialization. Also, it is possible to make it appear as if the total points are gradually increasing from the player's point of view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the total value has disappeared, and to preferably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game after the total points have been initialized.

After performing the point suggestion performance after the execution lottery, the point suggestion performance is not executed without performing the execution lottery in a state where the execution of the point suggestion performance is restricted. That is, since the execution of the point suggesting effect is forcibly prohibited, it is possible to preferably suppress the suggesting effect reflecting the initialized total points from being performed.

When the current total points (accumulated points) are greater than the holding points held in the RAM 183, the total points are updated as new holding points. According to this configuration, it is possible to limit the execution of the point suggesting effect based on the maximum value of the total points obtained through the game up to that point. As a result, it is possible to execute the point-suggestion effect only when the total points that update the highest value up to that point are obtained, and it is possible to give the player the impression that the total points continue to increase. I can hold you.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so as to expand opportunities for executing the point suggesting effect. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Process for executing point effect>
The point effect execution processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58(a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of FIG. In FIG. 58(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not a suggested effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The suggesting effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point suggesting effect should be executed. If the suggestion effect flag is set, the flag is cleared at step S2802, and then the type lottery table (FIG. 52) is obtained at step S2803. In step S2804, lottery processing for point suggestion effect is executed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183.

In step S3101, the point-to-use table stored in the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the point-to-use corresponding to the type (mode) of suggestive effect assigned by the lottery process is specified. In the use point table, as shown in FIG. 58(b), specific use points are determined for each aspect of the point suggestive effect, and larger use points are assigned to the higher suggestive effect. For example, 0 points for no effect, 1 point for small bubble effect (Fig. 55(a)), 3 points for mid-bubble effect (Fig. 55(b)), large bubble effect (Fig. 55(c) )) is assigned 4 points, and 5 points are assigned to the extra-large bubble effect (FIG. 55(d)). The use point is information indicating how many points the suggested effect (the effect selected by lottery) to be executed this time corresponds to.

In step S3102, the specified usage points are subtracted from the accumulated points at that time to calculate a difference value. The calculated difference value is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 183 . In the above description, the points used are subtracted from the accumulated points. , the retained points are updated by the accumulated points, and both have the same value (steps S2604 to S2608 in FIG. 50A), so the processing of this step is to subtract the used points from the retained points. can also

After execution of step S3102, in step S2805, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the point suggestion effect drawn in step S2804 is executed. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the process of specifying the points to be used and the process of calculating the difference value are performed before step S2805 is executed. Therefore, it may be performed after execution of step S2805.

<Start effect setting processing>
The start effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the effect setting process at the start of FIG. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 48, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After the execution of step S2309 (second AT winning effect setting processing) or when a negative determination is made in step S2308 (when the second AT winning command has not been received as the current start command), in step S2310, the current start It is determined whether or not an advantageous section start command has been received as an hour command. When the advantageous section start command is received,
At step S2311, the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not a point giving command has been received as the command at the start of this time. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 101 is configured to perform a point grant lottery at the start of the advantageous section, and this step includes the point grant lottery. to determine whether or not points have been given. In addition to information indicating that points have been given, the point giving command includes information indicating the number of points given in this giving lottery and the total number of points.

If a point award command has been received, that is, if points have been awarded in the current award lottery process, the process for the first point is executed in step S3201. On the other hand, if the point giving command has not been received (if points have not been given), the second point processing is executed in step S3202. The details of the processing for the first point and the processing for the second point will be described later. After execution of step S3201 or step S3202, the process proceeds to step S2314 (point effect execution processing).

If a negative determination is made in step S2310 (if the advantageous section start command has not been received), the process advances to step S3203 to determine whether a point trigger command (step S1111 in FIG. 35) has been received as the command at the start of this time. judge. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the number of games in which the first AT mode transition lottery was not won while staying in the advantageous section (the number of addictive games) is a specific number. When reaching (for example, 600 games), the main controller 101 recognizes that the execution trigger for the point award lottery has been established, and transmits a point trigger command. This step determines whether or not the trigger has been established.

When the point trigger command is received, the trigger establishment flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S3204. The trigger establishment flag is for the CPU 181 to recognize that the trigger for the point award lottery based on the number of addictive games reaching a specific number has been established. After execution of step S3204 or when a negative determination is made in step S3203 (when the point trigger command is not received), the process proceeds to step S2314 (point effect execution processing).

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of all stop of FIG. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the determination in step S2403 is affirmative (if the CZ end command has been received) or if the determination in step S2410 is negative (if the point achievement command has not been received), in step S2404 or step S2412, all It is determined whether or not a point giving command has been received as a stop command. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the case where the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery Each time the mode ends, main controller 101 performs a point award lottery, and step S2404 or step S2412 determines whether or not points have been awarded in the point award lottery.

If a point award command has been received, that is, if points have been awarded in the current award lottery process, the process for the first point is executed in step S3301. On the other hand, if the point grant command has not been received (if points have not been granted), the second point processing is executed in step S3302. The processing for the first point and the processing for the second point are the same as the processing for the first point and the processing for the second point of the effect setting processing at start (FIG. 59). After execution of step S3301 or step S3302, the process proceeds to step S2406 (CZ end effect setting process) or step S2414 (first AT end effect setting process).

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (if the second AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S3303 whether or not the trigger establishment flag is set in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. If the trigger establishment flag is established, that is, if the point award lottery trigger based on the number of casual games reaching a specific number is established, the trigger establishment flag is cleared in step S3304, and then, In step S3305, it is determined whether or not a point giving command has been received as the current all stop command.

If the point imparting command has been received, the first point processing is executed in step S3306, and if the point imparting command has not been received, the second point processing is executed in step S3307. The processing for the first point and the processing for the second point are the same as the processing for the first point and the processing for the second point of the effect setting processing at start (FIG. 59). After execution of step S3306 or step S3307, the process proceeds to step S2423 (other effect setting processing at all stop).

<First point processing>
The processing for the first point in steps S3201, S3301, and S3306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 61, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the point processing of FIG. 50(a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the accumulated points are greater than the held points, processing for updating the held points is executed in step S2605. After that, in step S2606, an effect execution lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a point suggestion effect is performed. If the execution lottery is won, a type lottery ( A lottery process for determining which point suggesting effect is to be performed) is performed. The type lottery in this case is performed using the latest held points updated in step S2605.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2604 (if the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points), the process advances to step S3401 to determine whether the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 58) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 1). judge. When the difference value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S2606 to perform effect execution lottery processing. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, when the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points, the point-suggestion effect is uniformly not executed. If the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is configured to permit execution of the point suggesting effect. The effect execution lottery in this case is performed with the same winning probability as the execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points (the flow when the positive determination is made in step S2604 in FIG. 61).

Then, in the case of winning in the execution lottery, in step S2804 of the point effect execution processing (FIG. 58), the point suggestion effect used for the type lottery table (FIG. 52), the retained points, and the lottery counter We perform classification lottery of this. However, if the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted based on the fact that the difference value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the retained points are not updated. Use points.

<Second point processing>
The processing for the second point in steps S3202, S3302, and S3307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. All of these processes are executed when points are not awarded although the opportunity for the point grant lottery has been established.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 58) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 1). If the difference value is smaller than the predetermined value, the process for the second point is terminated. If the difference value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the processing of steps S3502 to S3504 is executed. These processes are the same as steps S2606 to S2608 in FIG. That is, a lottery for execution of the point suggesting effect is performed, and when the execution is won, the suggesting effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. - 特許庁

<Flow of Point Suggestion Production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. Here, it is assumed that the execution of the point-suggesting effect is won in any of the effect execution lotteries when points are awarded.

First, referring to FIG. 63, a description will be given of the flow when points are awarded but the accumulated points at that time are less than the retained points (maximum value).

At timing t1, when a point award lottery execution opportunity is established in the middle of the advantageous section A, the main controller 101 executes the point award lottery. At that time, if 3 points are awarded, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main controller 101 (step S1710 in FIG. 41), and the held points are updated to 3 points in the display control device 81 (FIG. 61 step S2605).

Also, at timing t1, a type lottery corresponding to the holding points of 3 is executed using the type lottery table (FIG. 52). At that time, it is assumed that a small bubble effect with a selection probability of 30% is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives one point as the use point corresponding to the small bubble effect (step S3101 in FIG. 58(a), FIG. 58(b)). Then, the used points (1 point) are subtracted from the accumulated points (3 points), and 2 points are calculated as the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 58(a)). Also, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 63(a), a small bubble effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

When advantageous section A ends at timing t2, main controller 101 executes an initialization process (step S2109 in FIG. 45) to set the total points to the initial value (0). At this time, the accumulated points are set to the initial value (0) in the display control device 81 as well, but the retained points are not initialized and the value (3) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as is. Also, the difference value is not initialized, and the value (2) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as it is.

At timing t3, when a point grant lottery execution opportunity is established in the middle of the next advantageous section B, the point grant lottery is executed by the main controller 101 . At that time, if 1 point is awarded, the total points are updated to 1 point in main controller 101 . At this time, in the display control device 81, since the accumulated points (1 point) at that time is smaller than the retained points (3 points), the retained points are not updated and remain at 3 points.

In this case, in the first embodiment, the performance execution lottery is not performed because the execution of the point suggestion performance should be restricted. A lottery for effect execution is performed based on this (steps S2604 and S3401 in FIG. 61). In the effect execution lottery at this time, the same lottery table as the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points is used. Therefore, the point suggestion effect is performed with the same probability as when the accumulated points are greater than the held points.

Assuming that the execution of the point-suggesting effect is won in the effect execution lottery, in the subsequent type lottery, lottery processing corresponding to the retained points (3 points) at that time is executed. At that time, it is assumed that the 70% in-bubble effect is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, in the display control device 81, 3 points are derived as use points corresponding to the in-bubble effect (FIG. 58(b)), and the difference value obtained by subtracting the use points (3 points) from the accumulated points (3 points) is 0 points are calculated. Also, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 63(b), an in-bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

At the timing t4 of the advantageous section B, when the opportunity to execute the point award lottery is established, the main controller 101 executes the point award lottery again. As a result, if one point is awarded, the total points are updated to two points in main controller 101 . As in the case of timing t3, the accumulated points (2 points) at that time point are smaller than the retained points (3 points). Execution of performance is restricted. That is, the point suggesting effect is not executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of the flow in the case where points are not awarded even though an opportunity to execute the point grant lottery has been established.

When the execution trigger for the point award lottery is established at timing t1, the main controller 101 executes the point award lottery. At that time, if 3 points are awarded, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main controller 101 and the retained points are updated to 3 points in the display control device 81 .

Also, at timing t1, a type lottery corresponding to the holding points of 3 is executed using a type lottery table. At that time, it is assumed that a small bubble effect with a selection probability of 30% is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 1 point as the usage point corresponding to the small bubble effect, and calculates 2 points as a difference value by subtracting the usage point (1 point) from the accumulated points (3 points). Also, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 64(a), a small bubble effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

When the execution trigger for the point award lottery is established at timing t2, the main controller 101 executes the point award lottery. In that case, it is assumed that no points were given. In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the point-suggesting effect is not uniformly executed. is performed (steps S3302 and S3307 in FIG. 60, FIG. 62). In the effect execution lottery at this time, the same lottery table as the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points is used.

Assuming that the execution of the point-suggesting effect is won in the effect execution lottery, in the subsequent type lottery, lottery processing corresponding to the retained points (3 points) at that time is executed. At that time, it is assumed that the 70% in-bubble effect is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 3 points as use points corresponding to the in-bubble effect, and calculates 0 points as a difference value obtained by subtracting the use points (3 points) from the accumulated points (3 points). Further, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 64(b), an in-bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

At timing t3, when the trigger for executing the point award lottery is established again, the main controller 101 executes the point award lottery. In that case, it is assumed that no points were given. As in the case of timing t2, the accumulated points (2 points) at that time point are smaller than the retained points (3 points). The lottery is not performed and the point suggesting effect is not executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

After the previous point suggestive effect is executed, the difference value between the points used corresponding to the point suggestive effect and the total points (accumulated points) when the effect is performed is derived, and based on the difference value It was configured to execute the point suggestion production.

As described in the first embodiment, in the configuration where the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section, if the total points at that time is equal to or less than the holding points, the execution of the point suggestion effect can be restricted. , it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the total points have been initialized. On the other hand, however, if the execution frequency of the point suggesting effect is reduced due to execution restrictions, the chances for the player to become aware of the existence of the points are reduced, so there is a concern that the player's interest in the points will gradually decline. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect in the restricted state. There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the points have been lost, and the original meaning of restricting the performance execution will be lost. Conversely, if the suggestive effect is performed in correspondence with the retained points, the notification will be induced in a manner that deviates from the actual total points, and the player's confidence in the notification may be lowered.

In this regard, in the present configuration, the point suggestion effect based on the difference value between the used points and the retained points corresponding to the previous point suggestion performance is performed under the restricted state. Since the subsequent suggestive effect utilizes the surplus of the total points for the suggested effect that has already been executed, by executing such effect in a restricted state, the aspect of the point suggestive effect is matched with the actual total points. The execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased while Therefore, it is possible to suitably deal with the inconvenience caused by the establishment of the restricted state.

Even if the total points are initialized in the main controller 101, the difference value is held. With this configuration, when the total points are initialized, the difference value does not disappear and is maintained thereafter, so when limiting the execution of the point suggesting effect, it becomes possible to use the difference value across the initialization. . As a result, the point suggestion effect can be executed by utilizing the difference value generated by the point suggestion effect before initialization after the initialization, and in the configuration in which the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section, the point suggestion effect It is possible to suitably increase the execution frequency of

The configuration is such that the point suggesting effect based on the difference value is executed when points are not awarded. According to this configuration, the point suggestion effect can be performed even when points are not given, and the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be preferably increased. Note that the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be performed under the restricted state, and may be performed under the non-restricted state, for example, when the point award lottery is lost although the grant lottery opportunity is established.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that even when the accumulated points are greater than the retained points, the retained points may not be updated. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<First point lottery process>
The first point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41 . After executing step S1710 (the process of adding the given points to the value of the PT counter (accumulated points)), in step S1711, a point giving command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . In the point awarding command according to the present embodiment, in addition to information indicating that points have been awarded, information indicating the number of points awarded in this awarding lottery, information indicating the total number of points, and any lottery trigger for points It contains information on whether or not it has been granted. It should be noted that this information may be included in a point trigger command that is set when the point award opportunity is established instead of or in addition to the point award command.

<Point processing>
Point processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2313 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and steps S2405, S2413 and S2418 of the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 49). This is executed in place of the point processing of 50(a). In FIG. 65, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 50(a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S2603 (grasp of holding points), it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the value of accumulated points ascertained in step S2601 is greater than the value of holding points ascertained in step S2603. If the accumulated points are greater than the held points, that is, if the accumulated points greater than the highest value up to that point are grasped, the flow advances to step S3601, and the current point grant is the end of the first AT mode (shift to the second AT mode). It is determined whether or not it is based on the end of the first AT mode in the state of non-winning in the lottery. The grant opportunity (grant lottery opportunity) based on the end of the first AT mode is the final opportunity that can be established in the advantageous section, but this step is performed before the end of the advantageous section (initialization of accumulated points). It will be determined whether or not it was done due to the final opportunity in the previous).

If the points given this time are not based on the termination of the first AT mode, the process advances to step S2605 to execute processing for updating the held points. On the other hand, if the point award this time is based on the termination of the first AT mode, the process advances to step S3602 to determine whether or not the accumulated points at that time are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 3). Note that this point processing is executed when the accumulated points have not reached the privilege grant value (for example, 5) (step S2410 in FIG. 49). means that the points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value and less than the privilege grant value.

If the accumulated points are not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process advances to step S2605 to update the retained points. Conversely, if the accumulated points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process of step S2605 is skipped and the retained point update process is not executed. For example, if the retained points before giving points are 1 point and the accumulated points after giving points are 4 points, the held points are not updated and maintained at 1 point. After execution of step S2605 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S2606, and a lottery for execution of the point suggestion effect is performed.

<Process for executing point effect>
The point effect execution processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. If the suggestive effect flag is set in step S2801, that is, if the situation is such that the point suggestive effect should be executed, then in step S2804, effect type lottery for selecting the type of point suggestive effect is executed. The effect type lottery is performed using a type lottery table (Fig. 52), retention points, and a lottery counter (random number), and the retention points are updated in the previous point processing (Fig. 65). In this case, the updated points are used as the retained points used at the time of the lottery. For example, in a situation where the retained points before giving points are 1 point and the accumulated points after giving points are 4 points, if the retained points are updated, 4 points are used as the retained points at the time of lottery, and bubbles are added. A production type is selected from medium production and bubble large production.

On the other hand, if the held points have not been updated in the previous point processing, the held points before the points are given are used as the held points used at the time of the lottery. That is, even if points are awarded at the time of ending the first AT mode, and the accumulated points become larger than the holding points due to the awarded points, the accumulated points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 3 points). If the update of the retained points is restricted (YES in step S2604, YES in step S3601, and YES in step S3602 in the previous point processing (FIG. 65)), the accumulated points at that time are not used, but rather A lottery for the type of point suggestion performance is performed using the previously held points which are also small values. For example, in a situation where the retained points before granting points are 1 point and the accumulated points after granting points are 4 points, if the retained points are not updated, 1 point is used as the retained points at the time of lottery, and the effect is performed. The effect type is selected from none and small bubble effect. In other words, the lottery for the type of performance is performed using the same number of points as the retained points used when executing the previous point suggesting performance, so that the given points this time are not reflected in the selected performance type.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As described in the first embodiment, by setting the highest value obtained in the game up to that point as the holding point, it is possible to suitably give the player the impression that the total points are increasing. become. On the other hand, however, if the highest value of each time is always reflected as the holding point, the gap between the initial value and the initial value when the total points are initialized tends to increase. As a result, it takes longer for the actual total points to catch up with the held points, and the execution frequency of the point suggesting effect tends to decrease significantly.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the total points exceed the retention points, the retention points are not updated in some cases, so the gap between the initial value and the initial value when initialized increases. is suppressed. As a result, the execution frequency of the point-suggesting effect is greatly reduced, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the points from waning.

When points are given at the final giving opportunity before the total points are initialized, the held points are not updated even if the total points exceed the held points.

After the points are given by the final giving opportunity before the initialization, no new points are given until the initialization, so that the privilege giving value is not reached before the initialization. The points at the final opportunity are discarded by the subsequent initialization, and ultimately do not contribute to reaching the privilege award value. Based on such characteristics, in the present embodiment, if the point granting trigger is the final trigger before initialization, the granted points are not reflected in the retained points. It is possible to suppress the useless widening of the gap with the value. In addition, since the points at the final opportunity do not contribute to reaching the privilege grant value as described above, even if the suggestive effect corresponding to such points is not performed, the player will be able to reach the privilege grant value. It can be said that there is no problem in aiming to reach the target. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without interfering with the game of the player.

When the held points are not updated, the type of the point suggesting effect to be executed at that time is determined based on the held points before giving the points.

For example, if the retention points are not updated due to update restrictions, and the type of point suggestion effect is determined based on the actual total points (the total points in which the granted points are reflected), the total points and the retention Since the value is different from the point, the type of the point suggestion effect and the retained points are not consistent, which may cause confusion for the player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the type of point suggestive effect is determined based on the retained points (retained points in a state where updating is postponed) before the point is granted, the type of point suggestive effect and the retained points are determined. It becomes possible to match them appropriately.

Even if there is an opportunity to apply the retention point update restriction, if the total points is smaller than a predetermined value, the retention point is updated without the update restriction.

If the configuration is such that the retained points are not updated at all times in the case of granting opportunities that are subject to update restrictions, the fact that the total points have increased will not be given at that opportunity, so points will be awarded to the player at that opportunity. It may give the impression that there is no possibility of being redeemed (in other words, the total points will not increase on that occasion). In this regard, in the present embodiment, the update of the held points is restricted only when the total points reflecting the points given at that opportunity is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, in a situation where the total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value and the gap between the initial value and the initial value when initialized is expected to increase, the total points are avoided from being reflected in the retained points, If the total points is less than the predetermined value, the retained points are updated, and an increase in the total points can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to notify that the total points have increased while preventing the gap from the initial value at the time of initialization from becoming too large.

In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the present embodiment is applied to the above first embodiment has been described, but this embodiment can also be applied to the above second embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the display control device 81 stores information corresponding to points, but in the present embodiment, information corresponding to the type of point suggestion effect that has been executed is stored. . This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Process for executing point effect>
The point effect execution processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66(a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of FIG. In FIG. 66(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the suggestive effect flag is set in step S2801, that is, if the situation is such that the point suggestive effect should be executed, then in step S2804, effect type lottery for selecting the type of point suggestive effect is executed. At this time, in the present embodiment, accumulation points are used instead of holding points. That is, the type of the point suggesting effect is selected based on the acquired type lottery table (FIG. 52), the current accumulated points, and the lottery counter (random number).

In the subsequent step S3701, the rank information table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the rank information of the type assigned by the type lottery in step S2804 is grasped. As shown in FIG. 66(b), rank information corresponding to each effect type is set in the rank information table. For example, when the type of the point suggestion effect distributed in step S2804 is the small bubble effect, 1 is derived as the rank information.

In step S3702, a process of updating the rank information obtained in step S3701 as new held rank information is executed. Specifically, the rank information (previous rank information) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is rewritten with the current rank information ascertained in step S3701. After execution of step S3702, in step S2805, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the point suggestion effect drawn in step S2804 is executed.

In the present embodiment, the rank information grasping process and the update process are performed before the execution of step S2805. You may perform after execution of S2805.

<Point processing>
The processing for points according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67(a). This process is executed in step S2313 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and steps S2405, S2413 and S2418 of the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 49). This is executed in place of the point processing of 50(a). In addition, in FIG. 67(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 50(a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2601, based on the point giving command received from main controller 101, the total points (the number of points accumulated on the main controller 101 side) are specified, and accumulated points are grasped. In step S2602, the accumulated points stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are updated to the accumulated points grasped in step S2601.

In step S3801, the held rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d is read out and grasped. Since this processing for points is performed prior to the processing for executing the point effect shown in FIG. becomes.

In step S3802, the table for rank information (FIG. 66(b)) is referenced to specify the corresponding points corresponding to the retained rank information, and it is determined whether or not the accumulated points updated in step S2602 are greater than the corresponding points. judge. For example, if the held rank information is 1, 2 points are identified as the corresponding points, and it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are greater than 2 points. Here, since the corresponding points indicate how many points the point suggesting effect executed last time corresponds to, the processing of this step is based on the point suggested by the previous point suggesting effect with the accumulated points this time. It can also be said that it determines whether or not it is greater than .

When the accumulated points are larger than the corresponding points, the process advances to step S2606 to execute an effect execution lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a point suggestion effect. In other words, if it is recognized that the accumulated points this time are increasing with respect to the points suggested in the previous point suggesting presentation, execution of the point suggesting presentation is permitted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3802 (if the accumulated points are equal to or less than the corresponding points), the processing for points ends without executing the processing after step S2606. That is, when the number of points accumulated this time is the same as or less than the points suggested in the previous point suggestion performance, execution of the point suggestion performance is restricted and not executed.

As described above, the point effect execution process of FIG. 66(a) is performed after the end of this point process. Therefore, the effect type lottery in step S2804 in the point effect execution process is performed using the accumulated points updated in step S2602 (accumulated points in a state in which the points given at the present giving opportunity are reflected). . In other words, whether or not to execute the point suggestive effect is determined by comparing with the previous point suggestive effect, but if it is to be executed, the type lottery is made corresponding to the latest accumulated points. Therefore, as the type of the current point suggestion effect, a higher level than the previous point suggestion effect is likely to be selected.

<Release treatment>
The release processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67(b). This process is executed in step S2411 of the effect setting process (FIG. 49) at the time of all stop in the display control device 81, except that step S3901 is executed in place of step S2702. Same as release treatment.

In step S3901, a process of clearing (initializing) holding rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. That is, the retention rank information is initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when a privilege based on reaching the privilege grant value is granted. retained throughout.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Rank information corresponding to the type of the executed point suggestive effect is stored, and this information is retained as retained rank information even when the total points are initialized, and the execution limit of the point suggestive effect is restricted based on this retained rank information. It was configured to According to this configuration, after the total points have been initialized, it is possible to suppress the execution of a performance that is lower than the point suggestion performance executed before the initialization. A similar effect can be obtained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted based on the rank of the executed point suggestion effect (in other words, the type of the point suggestion effect that is executed) rather than the points. It can be expected that the restrictions will be relaxed more than in the case of the first embodiment, and that the decrease in the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect will be suppressed. For example, if the type corresponding to the value smaller than the actual total points is drawn in the previous point suggestion effect, the one corresponding to the value smaller than the actual total points is retained as retention rank information, so after that Even if the total points are not increased when the point suggesting performance is executed, the total points (accumulated points) exceed the corresponding points, and the point suggesting performance is allowed to be executed. In other words, there is a case where the point-suggestion effect can be executed even when points are not awarded.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the retention rank information is used instead of the retention points according to the first embodiment. It is also possible to apply the third embodiment. For example, in the case of the third embodiment, it may be configured to limit the update of the held rank information by the rank information of the point suggesting effect executed at the final opportunity before initialization.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display control device 81 gives points separately from the points given by the main control device 101, and both the points on the display control device 81 side and the points on the main control device 101 side are combined. It is configured to refer to and execute a point effect. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 83. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

Since this embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in terms of privilege grant value and point grant opportunity, the difference will be described with reference to FIG. 68 .

The privilege grant value according to the present embodiment is 20 points. Therefore, when the points given by the main controller 101 are 20 points or more, the privilege is given. Note that the content of the privilege is the transition to the second AT mode as in each of the above embodiments, and the opportunity to give the privilege is the end of the first AT mode as in each of the above embodiments.

In the present embodiment, 6 points are set as points awarding opportunities, and an awarding opportunity when addicted to 200 games and an awarding opportunity when addicted to 400 games are added to the awarding opportunities according to the above embodiments. It is Note that the point grant rate and the like for each grant opportunity will be described later in detail.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to realize the point giving structure and the privilege giving structure will be described.

<Processing for ending the first AT mode>
The processing for ending the first AT mode according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69(a). This process is executed in step S1206 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 36) in main controller 101, and is executed in place of the first AT end process in FIG. In FIG. 69(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 39, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S1503 (processing for clearing the first AT flag), the process advances to step S1504 to determine whether or not the second AT winning flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The 2nd AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the 2nd AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the 2nd AT winning flag is not set, that is, if the 2nd AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 1st AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4101, and the value of the PT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 20 or more.

If the PT counter value is 20 or more (if the total points have reached the privilege award value), the process advances to step S1508 to clear the PT counter value to zero. In step S1509, a point achievement command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the process proceeds to step S1506 (processing for setting the second AT start flag).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101 (the value of the PT counter is less than 20 and the total points have not reached the privilege grant value), the process proceeds to step S1510, and the first AT end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. to set. The first AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1511, the first AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then in step S4102, the point lottery flag E is set in the various flag storage area 106d. A plurality of types of flags for the point lottery are set so that the CPU 102 can recognize that the trigger for executing the point award lottery has been established. One of them, the point lottery flag E, indicates that the current grant lottery opportunity is based on the end of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery (FIG. 68). After execution of step S4102, the process proceeds to step S1513 (processing for setting a point trigger command).

<Section display first processing>
Section display first processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69(b). This process is executed in step S315 of the lottery process (FIG. 18), and is executed instead of the section display first process of FIG. In FIG. 69(b), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 43, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the process of step S1807 (the process of setting 700 in the ceiling counter), in step S4201, the process of inputting 200 into the outlier counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The loss counter is for counting the number of games in which the first AT mode transition lottery was not won while staying in the advantageous section. In step S4202, the 200G flag is set in each flag storage area 106d of RAM106. The 200G flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the period of counting the number of games using the loss counter is up to 200 games. After execution of step S4202, the second point lottery process of step S4203 is executed. The details of the second point lottery process will be described later.

<Processing for updating the number of games>
The number-of-games update process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S314 of the lottery process (FIG. 18), and is executed in place of the game number update process of FIG. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 35, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1108, the value of the error counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is updated by subtracting 1. After that, in step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter is 0. If the value of the out-counter is 0, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the 200G flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . If the 200G flag is set, it means that the number of addictive games has reached 200. In this case, the point lottery flag A is set in the flag storage area 106d at step S4302. The point lottery flag A is used by the CPU 102 to recognize that the current award lottery trigger is based on the number of addictive games reaching 200 games (FIG. 68).

After step S4302 is executed, the 200G flag in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared in step S4303, and the 400G flag is set in the area 106d. 200 is input to . The 400G flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the period for counting the number of games using the loss counter is from the 201st game to the 400th game.

If the determination in step S4301 is negative (the 200G flag is not set), the process advances to step S4305 to determine whether the 400G flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. If the 400G flag is set, it means that the number of addictive games has reached 400. In this case, the point lottery flag B is set in the flag storage area 106d at step S4306. The point lottery flag B is used by the CPU 102 to recognize that the current award lottery trigger is based on the number of addictive games reaching 400 (FIG. 68).

After step S4306 is executed, the 400G flag in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared in step S4307, and the 600G flag is set in the area 106d. 200 is input to . The 600G flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that the period for counting the number of games using the losing counter is from the 401st game to the 600th game.

If the determination in step S4305 is negative (the 400G flag is not set), the flow advances to step S4308 to determine whether the 600G flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. If the 600G flag is set, it means that the number of addictive games has reached 600. In this case, the point lottery flag C is set in the flag storage area 106d at step S4309. The point lottery flag C is used by the CPU 102 to recognize that the current award lottery trigger is based on the number of addictive games reaching 600 games (FIG. 68). At step S4310, the 600G flag is cleared, and then the process of step S1111 (the process of setting the point trigger flag) is executed.

<First point lottery process>
The first point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71(a). This process is executed in step S1208 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 36), and is executed in place of the first point lottery process of FIG. In FIG. 71(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701 (no AT flag is set), the flow advances to step S4401 to determine whether any point lottery flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106 of the RAM 106. do. If any point lottery flag is set, the point lottery table corresponding to the point lottery flag is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S4402. The point lottery table, as shown in FIG. 72, is a table for performing a grant execution lottery to determine whether or not to award points, and a point number lottery to determine how many points to award if points are awarded. be. In this embodiment, three types of 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points are set as the number of points to be given.

In step S4402, for example, if the point lottery flag A is set, the point lottery table A corresponding to it is acquired (FIG. 72). The point lottery table A is set for the 200 game enthusiast. In the table A, the probability that the number of points is 0 (no points are awarded) is 70%, which is the highest. Also, the probabilities of giving 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points are equal, and each is set to 10%. Also, in the point lottery table B for 400-game addiction, the same probabilities as in the point lottery table A are set for the point award probability and the distribution rate of each point.

In the point lottery table C for addicted to 600 games, the probability that the number of points becomes 0 is 50%, which is set lower than the point lottery tables A and B. That is, when the number of addictive games is large, points are likely to be awarded. Regarding the number of points to be awarded, 5 points and 10 points have the same probability, and 20 points corresponding to the privilege award value is set lower than them.

In addition, in the point lottery table D when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and in the point lottery table E when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, points are also determined. The grant probability and the allocation rate of each point number are set to be the same as those in the point lottery table C.

Note that the point lottery tables A to E are merely examples, and the point grant probability and the point distribution probability can be set arbitrarily. In addition, although it is configured to use a separate lottery table corresponding to the establishment of each opportunity, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a common lottery table corresponding to all opportunities is provided (probability of awarding points and number of points It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distribution rate does not differ for each opportunity.

Returning to the description of the first point lottery process (Fig. 71(a)), after acquiring the point lottery table in step S4402, the point grant lottery process is executed in step S1708. In the point giving lottery process, lottery for the number of points is performed based on the acquired point lottery table and lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG.

<Second point lottery process>
The second point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71(b). This process is executed in step S4203 of the first section display process (FIG. 69(b)), and is executed in place of the second point lottery process of FIG. In FIG. 71(b), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After setting the point trigger command in step S1902, the point lottery table F is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S4501. Since the second point lottery process is executed at the start of the advantageous section (see FIGS. 43 and 71(b)), the process of step S4501 is based on the timing of the start of the advantageous section. , the corresponding point lottery table is obtained. In the point lottery table F, as shown in FIG. 72, the probability that the number of points will be 0 (no points awarded) is 70%, and the point award probability is set to be low similarly to the point lottery tables A and B. It is However, when points are awarded, the number of points to be distributed is 0% for 5 points, and the distribution rate for 10 points is increased accordingly. In other words, although it is difficult to award points at the time of awarding at the start of the advantageous section, a higher number of points is awarded if points are awarded. It should be noted that the point lottery table F is also just an example like the other point lottery tables, and the point grant probability and the distribution of the number of points can be arbitrarily set.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 in this embodiment will be described.

<Start effect setting processing>
The start effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (FIG. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed instead of the effect setting process at the start of FIG. In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 48, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start command (step S1810 in FIG. 43) has been received as the current start time command. If the advantageous interval start command has been received, the advantageous interval flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2311.

In step S4601, the number of points (given points) given by the main controller 101 at the point giving opportunity at the start of the advantageous section is grasped. This process is performed based on the point giving command (step S1907 in FIG. 44) transmitted from the main controller 101. FIG. In addition to information indicating that points have been given, the point giving command includes information indicating the number of points given in this giving lottery and the total number of points.

In this step, it is determined whether or not a point imparting command has been received as the command at the start of this time. On the other hand, when a point giving command is received, the command is analyzed to grasp the given points. As already explained, in the point grant lottery at the start of the advantageous section in the main controller 101, the grant probability of 5 points is set to 0% (Fig. 72), so the grant points grasped here are 0 points. , either 10 points or 20 points.

In step S4602, the sub-point lottery table corresponding to the given points grasped in step S4601 is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. FIG. The sub-points are points given by the display control device 81 separately from the points given by the main controller 101 side.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the sub-point lottery table, a plurality of types of point numbers are set as the number of points that can be awarded in one awarding process, and a selection probability is set for each of these point numbers. In the present embodiment, four points are set as the number of points that can be given: 0 points (no sub-points given), 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points.

Further, in the various table storage area 182a, a plurality of sub-point lottery tables are provided corresponding to the magnitudes of points to be awarded by the main controller 101. FIG. As already explained, the number of points to be awarded at the start of the advantageous section is any of 0, 10, or 20 points. There are three types of tables: a table for 0 points, a table for 10 points, and a table for 20 points.

In the sub-point lottery table in the case where the main control unit 101 gives 0 points, the probability of getting 0 sub-points (no sub-points given) is 40%. The probability of getting points is 20%. In addition, in the sub-point lottery table in the case where the given points are 10 points, the probability that the sub-points will be 0 points is 40%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points and 30 points are 30% and 20%, respectively. % and 10%. In addition, in the sub-point lottery table where the given points are 20 points, the probability that the sub-points will be 0 points is 50%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are 20%, 20%, and 20%, respectively. 10%.

Here, when the allocation rate of the number of points when the sub-points are awarded is compared between the respective lottery tables, 10 sub-points are awarded in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 10 points. The probability is 50%, and the probability in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 0 points (33.3%), and the probability in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 20 points ( 40%). Further, in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 20 points, the probability that 20 sub-points are awarded is 40%, and in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 0 points. This is higher than the probability (33.3%) and the probability (33.3%) in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 10 points.

That is, when the main controller 101 gives 10 points, the sub-points of 10 points are more likely to be selected than other points, and the main controller 101 gives 20 points. In this case, 20 sub-points are more likely to be selected than other points. That is, when sub-points are awarded, the greater the number of points awarded on the main controller 101 side, the easier it is for a larger sub-point to be awarded.

Note that the number of sub-points and the numerical values of the sub-point lottery table are merely examples, and are not limited to the above. The number of sub-points, the number of types of points, the probability of giving sub-points, and the distribution probability of each point can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 73), after acquiring the sub-point lottery table in step S4602, the sub-point lottery process is executed in step S4603. In the sub-point lottery process, a sub-point lottery is drawn based on the obtained sub-point lottery table and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 183 b of the RAM 183 .

In step S4604, the sub-points drawn in step S4603 are added to the assigned points grasped in step S4601. For example, when 10 points are grasped as grant points and 10 points are drawn as sub-points, 20 points are derived as their added value.

In steps S4605 and S4606, the results of addition in step S4604 are stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 as production possible points and total points, respectively. As shown in FIG. 75(a), the point information storage area 183d is provided with an effectable point storage area 183e and a total point storage area 183f. Stored in the production possible point storage area 183e, and in step S4606, the result of the addition as the total point is stored in the total point storage area 183f. Details of the directable points and the total points will be described later.

It should be noted that if the given points ascertained in step S4601 is 0 points, the addition result stored in steps S4605 and S4606 is the sub-point obtained by the lottery in step S4603.

In step S4607, trigger flag A is set in various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. FIG. The trigger flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp which point award trigger (point award trigger on the main controller 101 side) this time is. As shown in FIG. A trigger flag A to a trigger flag F are set corresponding to the trigger. The opportunity flag A indicates that the current point award opportunity is based on the start of the advantageous section.

After execution of step S4607, a process for addition suggestion effect is executed in step S4608, and then a process for total suggestion effect is executed in step S4609. In the present embodiment, as an effect related to points, an award suggestion effect suggesting that points have been awarded and the number of points awarded at that time (the number of points awarded in one point awarding process). , and a total suggesting effect that suggests the total value of the given points (total points). The process for adding suggestion effect in step S4608 is the process for executing the adding suggestion effect, and the process for total suggestion effect in step S4609 is the process for executing the total suggestion effect. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

After execution of step S4609, another start effect setting process of step S2315 is executed, and then this start effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The all-stop effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2210 of the effect setting process (FIG. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at all stop of FIG. In FIG. 76, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), if a negative determination is made in step S2401 (if the CZ start command has not been received), in step S2403, is the CZ end command received as the current all-stop command? determine whether or not If the CZ end command has been received, the flow advances to step S4701 to determine whether or not the point trigger command (step S1312 in FIG. 37) has been received as the current all-stop command. The point opportunity command includes information indicating that the point award opportunity has been established and information indicating which trigger is the current award opportunity.

If the point trigger command has been received, the flow advances to step S4702 to set the trigger flag E in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The opportunity flag E is for the CPU 181 to recognize that the point grant opportunity based on the termination of the CZ mode without winning the first AT mode transition lottery has been established (FIG. 75(b)). In step S4703, a process for addition suggestion effect is executed. This process is the same as step S4608 described above. After execution of step S4703 or when a negative determination is made in step S4701 (when the point trigger command is not received), the process advances to step S2406 to execute setting processing of CZ end effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when a negative determination is made in step S2407 (when neither the first AT start command nor the second AT start command has been received), in step S2409 the current all stop time command to determine whether or not the first AT end command has been received. If the first AT end command has been received, the process advances to step S4704 to determine whether or not the point achievement command has been received. If the point achievement command has been received, release processing is executed in step S4705, and then other all-stop effect setting processing is executed in step S2423. Note that the release processing in step S4705 will be described later.

On the other hand, if the point achievement command has not been received, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not the point trigger command (step S1513 in FIG. 39) has been received. If the point trigger command has been received, the flow advances to step S4707 to set the trigger flag F in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The opportunity flag F is for the CPU 181 to recognize that the point grant opportunity based on the end of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery has been established (FIG. 75(b)).

In the following step S4708, a process for addition suggestion effect is executed. This process is the same as step S4608 described above. After execution of step S4708 or when a negative determination is made in step S4706 (when the point trigger command is not received), the process advances to step S2414 to execute the setting process of the 1st AT end effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76(c), if a negative determination is made in step S2415 (if the second AT end command has not been received), in step S4709, a point trigger command is received as the current all-stop command. Determine whether or not As already explained, in the present embodiment, when 200 games, 400 games, or 600 games are completed, main controller 101 is configured to provide a point award opportunity. It is determined whether or not the provision opportunity has been established.

If the point trigger command has been received, the process advances to step S4710 to set the corresponding trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined which of the 200 game addiction, 400 game addiction, and 600 game addiction has been established as the award trigger. Then, if the 200th game is addicted, the trigger flag B is set, if the 400th game is addicted, the trigger flag C is set, and if the 600th game is addicted, the trigger flag D is set (FIG. 75(b)). .

In step S4711, a process for addition suggestion effect is executed. This process is the same as step S4608 described above.

If the determination in step S4709 is negative (if the point trigger command has not been received), it is determined in step S2419 whether or not the initialization command has been received. If the initialization command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4712, and the point information (demonstrable points, total points, etc.) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is erased. After execution of step S4711 or step S4712, it progresses to step S2423 and performs other production|presentation setting processing at the time of all stop.

<Addition suggestion effect processing>
The addition suggestion effect processing in steps S4608, S4703, S4708, and S4711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a point giving command from main controller 101 has been received. If a point grant command has been received, that is, if points have been granted on the main controller 101 side, the process advances to step S4802 to execute processing for adding the grant points to the current effectable points. In this step, based on the received point giving command, the given points on the side of the main controller 101 are grasped, and the grasped given points are added to the present playable points stored in the playable point storage area 183e of the RAM 183. do. For example, if the number of assigned points ascertained is 5 points and the present number of points that can be produced is 10 points, 15 points are derived as a result of adding them. In subsequent step S4803, the addition result derived in step S4802 is stored as a new effectable point in the effectable point storage area 183e, and the effectable point is updated.

Here, the suggested effect to be given and the point that can be generated will be described.

First, the provision suggestion effect will be described. As already explained, the provision suggesting effect suggests that points have been given and the number of points for that given point (the number of points given in one point giving process). Although the details will be described later, the giving suggestive effect is not completely linked to the actual given points, but functions as an effect that suggests the given points as a position in the effect.

Although a specific aspect of the provision suggestion effect is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the point suggestion effect (FIG. 55) according to the first embodiment is used. That is, the point suggestion effect according to the first embodiment suggests the accumulated points (total points) at that time depending on the size of the bubble image. The presentation is configured to suggest the number of points to be given at this time of giving, depending on the size of the bubble image. As the types of provision suggestion effects, small bubble effect (Fig. 55 (a)), medium bubble effect (Fig. 55 (b)), large bubble effect (Fig. 55 (c)), extra large bubble effect (Fig. 55 (d) ) is provided, and the larger the bubble image displayed, the larger the points given this time.

Note that since the addition suggestion effect does not indicate the number of points by numbers or the like, the player cannot grasp the specific number of points even if one of the above effects is executed. That is, by looking at the provision suggesting effect, it is possible to roughly predict whether the number of points to be provided is large or small.

Next, the directable points will be explained. The production possible points are like points for performing the provision suggesting production, and in the present embodiment, the production possible points are consumed to execute the provision suggesting production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the effected points (used points) are set for each type of provision suggestion effect, and when the provision suggestion effect is executed, the effect corresponding to the type Done points are deducted from productionable points. For example, when a suggesting effect of adding a small bubble effect is executed, 5 points, which are already produced points, are deducted from the points that can be produced at that time, and the remainder becomes points for executing the next suggesting effect to be given. . Therefore, the giving suggestive effect is executed within the range of possible effect points.

Then, as already explained, the production possible points as points are given as the total value of the given points on the main control device 101 side and the sub points on the display control device 81 side at the start of the advantageous section (Fig. 73 steps S4603 to S4605). However, it does not end with giving only at the first time, and when new points are given by the main controller 101 after that, the number of points corresponding to that is accumulated and added to the production possible points. The processing of steps S4801 to S4803 corresponds to the cumulative addition processing.

After execution of step S4803 or if a negative determination is made in step S4801 (if the point giving command is not received), in step S4804 it is determined whether or not the current point that can be produced is a predetermined value (eg 5) or more. do. This process is for determining whether or not the number of points sufficient to execute the giving suggestion effect is secured as the current effectable points. Therefore, the predetermined value in this step is the minimum number of points required to execute the provision suggestion effect, in other words, the minimum value of the effected points (5 points) when executing the provision suggestion effect. 78(b)) is used.

If the point that can be produced is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S4805 to acquire the type lottery table corresponding to the trigger flag set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM183. The type lottery table is a table for performing both a performance execution lottery for whether or not to execute the giving suggestion performance and a type lottery for lottery for the type (mode) in the case of executing the giving suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the type lottery table for giving suggestion effects is set for each point giving opportunity. The probability of execution is set to 10% (probability of non-execution is 90%), and the probability of sorting by type when the addition suggestion effect is executed is 3% for each probability of small bubble effect to large bubble effect. , The probability of becoming an extra large bubble effect is set to 1%.

However, when the execution of the giving suggesting effect is selected, the type distribution is performed within the range of the effectable points at that time. For example, if the point that can be produced at that time is 10 points, as shown in FIG. The type of giving suggestion performance is selected from a small bubble performance with 5 completed points and a mid-bubble performance with 10 completed points. At that time, the 3% allocated to the large bubble effect and the 1% allocated to the extra large bubble effect were replaced with the small bubble effect with the minimum effected points, and the small bubble effect was 7% and the medium bubble effect was changed to 7%. A type lottery is performed by dividing the production with 3%. That is, when some types are excluded from the selection target, the type with the smaller effected points is more likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), also in the lottery table corresponding to the other opportunity, the execution probability of the giving suggestion effect and the distribution probability of the type when the giving suggestion effect is executed are set. Specifically, in the type lottery table B corresponding to the grant opportunity of 200 game addiction and the type lottery table C corresponding to the grant opportunity of 400 game addiction, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is 20% (the probability of non-execution is 80%), and in the type lottery table D corresponding to the 600 game addictive grant opportunity, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is set to 30% (probability of non-execution 70%). That is, in the case of the provision opportunity based on the number of addictive games, the more the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (in other words, the closer the advantageous section is to the end), the more likely the provision suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, the type lottery table E corresponds to the grant opportunity when the CZ mode ends without winning the 1st AT mode transition lottery, and the grant opportunity when the 1st AT mode ends without winning the 2nd AT mode transition lottery. In the type lottery table F, the execution probability of the provision suggestion effect is set to 40% (probability of non-execution is 60%).

Although not shown in FIG. 79(a), selection probabilities for each type are also set separately in the above-described type lottery tables B to F. Then, when the execution of the provision suggesting effect is selected, the type distribution is performed within the range of the effectable points at that point in time, as in the case of the provision opportunity at the start of the advantageous section. At that time, the probability assigned to the type excluded from selection is replaced with the small bubble effect with the minimum effected points.

The lottery table for each type is merely an example, and is not limited to the configuration described above. It is possible to arbitrarily set the execution probability of the provision suggestion effect and the distribution probability of each type.

Returning to the description of the provision suggestion effect process (FIG. 77), after the type lottery table is acquired in step S4805, in step S4806, a type lottery for drawing the type of point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, the lottery type lottery for the giving suggestion effect is performed based on the type lottery table obtained above, the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the possible effect points updated in step S4803.

In step S4807, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the type of provision suggestion effect selected by the lottery in step S4806 is executed. In the subsequent step S4808, the addition suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The provision suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the provision suggestion effect should be executed. When the provision suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processing of step S2211 in the presentation setting process (FIG. 47), the provision suggestion presentation in the lottery mode is executed based on the set presentation data. The corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that At that time, the addition suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

The execution timing of the giving suggestion effect is not particularly limited. or a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game), or the end timing of the game (when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped).

After execution of step S4808, in step S4809, the effect completed point corresponding to the lottery result of the effect type is grasped. For example, when the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are grasped as effect completed points. In step S4810, the effected points grasped in step S4809 are subtracted from the current effectable points. In step S4811, the result of the subtraction is stored as a new effectable point in the effectable point storage area 183e, and the effectable point is updated. Through the processing of steps S4809 to S4811, the execution amount of the present provision suggestion effect is reflected in the effectable points. After execution of step S4811, this process for addition suggestion effect|presentation is complete|finished.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S4804 (if the possible production points are less than the predetermined value), the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 is skipped because the production possible points are insufficient and the giving suggestion production is not executed. , terminates the processing for presenting suggestion effect.

<Total Suggestion Effect Processing>
The total suggestion effect processing in step S4609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not a point giving command from the main controller 101 has been received. If a point grant command has been received, that is, if points have been granted on the main controller 101 side, the flow advances to step S4902 to execute processing for adding the granted points to the current total points. In this step, based on the received point giving command, the awarded points on the main controller 101 side are grasped, and the grasped awarded points are added to the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM183. In subsequent step S4903, the addition result derived in step S4902 is stored as a new total point in the total point storage area 183f to update the total point.

Here, the total suggestive effect and the total points will be explained. As already explained, the total suggestive effect suggests the total value (total points) of the given points. That is, in the present embodiment, by making the player aware of the addition of points through the above-described addition suggestion effect, the total amount of points given is increased by the total suggestion effect, while increasing the interest in the game for accumulating points. By showing the extent to which the game has been reached, the player is given the impression that, for example, there is just a little more to go, and these effects are combined to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

A specific aspect of the total suggestive effect is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the total points are suggested by the color of light emitted from the upper lamp 63 . More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 81(a), the auxiliary display section 65 gives a notification to prompt the operation of the effect switch 66, such as "press the effect button". This notification is made at the start timing of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the player operates the effect switch 66, the upper lamp 63 emits light as shown in FIG. 81(c). In this case, there are four kinds of emission colors, namely, blue, yellow, green, and red, suggesting that the total number of points increases from blue to red. Since the total suggestive effect does not indicate the number of points by numbers or the like, the player cannot grasp the specific number of points even by looking at the light emission color of the upper lamp 63 . That is, by looking at the total suggestive effect, it is possible to roughly predict whether the total points are too much or too little.

The emission color of the upper lamp 63 is selected in correspondence with the total point value. The above selection is made correspondingly. At that time, when new points are given by the main controller 101, the given points are reflected in the total points, and steps S4901 to S4903 are processes for that purpose.

It should be noted that, unlike the production possible points, even if the total suggestive production is executed, the corresponding points are not subtracted from the total points. That is, at the start of the advantageous section, the total points are given by the main controller 101 side after the start value is given by the total of the points given by the main controller 101 side and the sub points on the display control device 81 side. Each time points are awarded, they will continue to increase.

Returning to the description of the total suggestion effect processing (FIG. 80), after execution of step S4903 or when a negative determination is made in step S4901 (when no point giving command is received), various flags are stored in RAM 183 in step S4904. It is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag is set in the area 183a. If the suggestive effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4905, and the effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the total suggestive effect is executed. In this step, an execution lottery table for total suggestive effect is acquired from various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and the lottery is performed based on the lottery table and lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b of RAM 183. .

The probability of winning the lottery for effect execution is not particularly limited, but when the lottery is executed in each game as in the present embodiment, the probability of winning is preferably lower than the probability of not winning. In addition, when a predetermined opportunity is established, such as when a specific number is stopped on the reels 32L to 32R, or when the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number, a lottery for execution of a total suggestive effect is performed. may be configured.

In step S4906, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S4905. If the player wins, the process advances to step S4907 to grasp the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM183. In step S4908, the type lottery table corresponding to the grasped total points is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. FIG.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, a plurality of tables corresponding to the number of points of the total points are set as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect. Get the one corresponding to the current total points. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 82, the total points are classified into less than 24 points, 25 points to 39 points, 40 points to 49 points, and 50 points or more. They are classified according to medium level, high level, and privilege provision value or higher.

In the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect, the selection probability of the effect mode (light emission color of the upper lamp 63) is set. For example, in the type lottery table corresponding to the case where the total points are less than 24 points, green and red are excluded from selection, and the probability of blue is set to 67%, and the probability of yellow is set to 33%. ing. I will omit the explanation of the detailed numerical settings for each type lottery table, but in the type lottery table for total suggestion production, the higher the number of total points, the more likely it is to select a higher luminescent color. Selection probability is set.

The lottery table for each category is merely an example, and the allocation of the number of points to each category and the selection probability of each luminescent color can be arbitrarily set.

After the type lottery table is obtained in step S4908, type lottery for total suggestion effect is performed in step S4909 based on the obtained type lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. In step S4910, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the total suggestive effect of the type selected by the type lottery in step S4909 is executed.

In step S4911, a total suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The total suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this way, in other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47), based on the set effect data, the lottery mode total suggestion effect is executed. The corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

The execution timing of the total suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and may be the game start timing (lever-on timing or reel rotation start timing), or the game midway timing (the timing at which a predetermined stop operation is performed). or a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game), or the end timing of the game (when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped).

After the execution of step S4911, if affirmative determination is made in step S4904 (if the suggestive effect flag is set) or if negative determination is made in step S4906 (if the effect execution lottery is not won), this total suggestive effect end the processing. The reason why the processing after step S4905 is skipped when the suggestive effect flag is set is to avoid overlapping execution with the added suggestive effect.

<Release treatment>
The release processing in step S4705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S5101, effect data for executing the point release effect is set. Note that the point release effect is the same as the point release effect (FIG. 56) according to the first embodiment. In step S5102, release effect flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The release effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point release effect should be executed, and is cleared when the point release effect is executed.

In step S5103, processing for clearing (initializing) the point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. Specifically, the effectable point and the total point stored in the effectable point storage area 183e and the total point storage area 183f are changed to the initial value (0), or the information of these points is erased. That is, the directable points and the total points are initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when a privilege based on reaching the privilege grant value is granted. After execution of step S5103, the process for release ends.

<About the flow of point production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

First, it is assumed that no points are awarded on the main controller 101 side and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side at the award opportunity a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the production possible points of the display control device 81 are 20 points which are the sum of these points, and the total points are also 20 points.

A type lottery for the giving suggestion performance is performed at the granting opportunity a1, and this type lottery is performed based on 20 performance possible points. That is, a small bubble effect, a medium bubble effect, and a large bubble effect for which the effected points are 20 points or less are selected (FIG. 78(b)), and the type is selected from among them. Also, in this type lottery, the execution lottery for the effect and the type lottery are performed together (FIG. 79).

As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that the small bubble effect is selected as the provision suggestion effect (phenomenon a2). For example, when the type lottery for the giving suggestion effect is performed based on the actual total points, the giving suggesting effect cannot be executed because the total points are 0 points. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the type lottery is performed based on the added value obtained by adding the sub-points, so it is possible to execute the provision suggestion effect. That is, since the execution lottery and the type lottery for the provision suggestion effect are performed based on the numerical information larger than the actual total points, the provision suggestion effect can be performed even when the main controller 101 side has not provided the points. become.

When a small bubble effect is selected as the giving suggestion effect, 5 points are grasped as corresponding effect completed points. Then, the 5 points are subtracted from 20 points, which are the points that can be produced at that time, and the points that can be produced are updated to 15 points. In this case, the total points are maintained at 20 points before the type lottery. For this reason, when the execution lottery for the total suggestive effect is won before the arrival of the next giving opportunity b1, a table for less than 24 points is acquired as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect (Fig. 82). Either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the type of total suggestive effect.

It is assumed that 10 points are awarded on the main controller 101 side at the next grant opportunity b1. In this case, the assigned points (10 points) are added to the present possible production points (15 points), and the production possible points are updated to 25 points. For this reason, the lottery for the type of provision suggestion effect at the provision opportunity b1 is performed based on 25 production possible points. In this case, a small bubble effect, a medium bubble effect, and a large bubble effect for which the already-produced points are 20 points or less are selected, and the type of suggesting effect to be added is selected from among them.

As a result of the above lottery, if the effect in bubbles is selected as the provision suggesting effect (phenomenon b2), 10 points, which are the corresponding effected points, are grasped. Then, the 10 points are subtracted from the 25 points that can be produced, and the possible production points are updated to 15 points.

Also, at the timing b1, the 10 points given by the main controller 101 side are added to the total points (20 points) at that time, and the total points are updated to 30 points. For this reason, if the execution lottery for the total suggestive effect is won before the next giving opportunity c1 arrives, a table for 25 points to 39 points (Fig. 82) is acquired as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect. Then, either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the type of total suggestive effect. At this time, yellow light emission is more likely to be selected than when the total points are less than 24 points, and it is more likely to be suggested that the total points are increasing.

It is assumed that points are not awarded on the main controller 101 side at the next grant opportunity c1. In this case, the production possible points remain unchanged at 15 points. Then, based on the effectable points, a lottery for the type of effect suggesting effect to be given at the effect opportunity c1 is performed (phenomenon c2). In this case, the small bubble effect and the medium bubble effect with the already-produced points of 15 points or less are selected, and the type of the giving suggestion effect is selected from among them. Therefore, even though points are not given on the main controller 101 side, it is possible to execute the giving suggestion effect which is either a small bubble effect or a medium bubble effect.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the effected points corresponding to the amount of execution of the provision suggesting effect are subtracted from the effectable points, and based on the remaining effectable points, the effecting effect is executed at the next effect execution opportunity. It is configured to perform control. The advantages of such a configuration will now be described with reference to FIG. Here, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, it is assumed that sub-points are not given in the display control device 81, and in the main control device 101, 10 points are given at the first giving opportunity A, and 10 points are given at the second giving opportunity B It is assumed that 5 points are given in , and no points are given in the third giving opportunity C.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), for example, in a configuration in which execution control of the provision suggestion effect is performed in units of points provided each time (a configuration in which the provision suggestion effect is executed based on one provision point for each provision). Assuming that the giving suggestion performance 231 for 5 points is performed at the first giving opportunity A when 10 points are given, the remaining 232, which is the unused 5 points, is terminated without being used thereafter. Therefore, at the next giving opportunity B, the giving suggestion effect 234 can only be executed within the range of 5 points, which is the new giving point 233, and furthermore, at the next giving opportunity C, the premise (base ), it is not possible to execute the giving suggestion effect. In other words, only 10 points out of 15 points, which are the sum of the points given from the giving opportunity A to the giving opportunity C, are used as the giving suggestion effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A certain 5 points are left as points for executing the next giving suggestion effect. Therefore, in the next giving opportunity B, the range is expanded to 10 points, which is the sum of the remaining 232 of the previous opportunity of 5 points and the 5 points of the new giving points 233, and the giving suggesting effect is executed. be able to. At that time, if the giving suggestion performance 234 for 5 points is performed, the remaining 5 points 235 are left as points for further executing the next giving suggestion performance. Therefore, in the next giving opportunity C, the giving suggesting effect can be executed within the range of 5 points even though the points are not given. In other words, all 15 points, which are the sum of the points given from the giving opportunity A to the giving opportunity C, can be used as points for executing the giving suggestion effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the points not used for the suggestion effect to be given are effectively utilized as points for the subsequent suggestion effect to be given. It is possible to efficiently execute the giving suggestion performance for the given points. As a result, it is possible to execute the giving suggestion performance on the premise that the number of points is larger than the actual given points, or to execute the giving suggestion performance even if no points are given. In particular, in a game in which a privilege is granted by reaching the privilege grant value, if the frequency of point granting is increased to increase the opportunity for giving suggestions, the degree of difficulty in reaching the privilege grant value will be lowered, and the degree of privilege will be reduced. has to be kept low, and the appeal to the players is lowered, so there is a restriction that the frequency of giving points cannot be increased so much. In light of such circumstances, it can be said that the effect of the present embodiment, in which it is possible to reduce the frequency of awarding points and increase the chances of presentation suggesting awarding, is more desirable.

Returning to the description of the flow of the point effect (FIG. 84), it is assumed that no points are given on the main controller 101 side at the subsequent award timing n1, and that the effectable points at that time are 0 points. In this case, since the number of points that can be produced is less than the number of points required to execute the provision suggestion production, the provision suggestion production is not executed. In this way, since the execution of the giving suggestion effect is restricted in relation to the effectable points, the frequency of the giving suggestion effect is not unnecessarily increased. The giving suggestion effect is performed in a state in which matching with the total value of the sub-points is achieved.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, points are awarded upon satisfaction of the granting condition, and when the total value (total points) reaches the privilege grant value, a privilege (transition to the second AT mode) is granted to the player. In addition, since the giving suggestion effect is performed as a notification that the given points are given, etc., the player can recognize that the total points will increase toward the privilege given value, and the points can be further increased. Motivation to increase is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly motivate players to continue playing, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for awarding points by the main control unit 101 to increase the frequency of presentation suggesting awarding, thereby increasing the player's interest in the points. preferable. On the other hand, however, if the number of opportunities to award points is increased, the degree of difficulty in reaching the privilege grant value will be lowered, and as a result, the degree of privilege must be kept low, and there is a risk that the appeal to players will decrease. . In other words, if the frequency of the specific notification is increased, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using points will be lost.

In this regard, in the present configuration, separately from the given points given by the main controller 101, a production possible point having a value larger than the given points is derived, and based on this production possible point, the giving suggestion production is executed. there is In this case, since it is possible to execute the giving suggestion effect on the premise that the value is larger than the actual given points, it is possible to increase the frequency of the effect. At that time, the effectable points are only used for the execution control of the provision suggestion effect by the display control device 81, and are not involved in the provision of the privilege by the main control device 101. Therefore, the difficulty of reaching the privilege provision value can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game by improving the notification frequency while preventing the game from losing its appeal using points.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution control is performed on the premise of a total point greater than the total point, instead of on the premise of the actual total point, even with respect to the total suggestion effect as the notification of suggesting the total point. and For example, if the actual total points is 0 points, there is a concern that the total suggestive effect cannot be performed. It can be performed. In other words, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the frequency of not only the additional suggestive effect but also the total suggestive effect.

It is configured to obtain the effectable points by adding the points given by the main control device 101 and the sub-points derived by the display control device 81.例文帳に追加

In the configuration of performing the giving suggestion effect, it is assumed that the points (given amount) given to the player are predicted from the content of the effect each time, and the player himself/herself sums them up to predict the total points. . For this reason, if the execution control of the provision suggestion effect is performed on the premise of a numerical value different from the given points, the provision suggestion effect that is far from the actual given points is executed, and the player greatly deviates from the actual total points. There is a risk of predicting the total value to be calculated. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the given points are used for deriving the production possible points, it is possible to derive the production possible points while ensuring the relevance with the actually given awarded points. Therefore, even though it is a configuration that uses directable points different from the given points, it is possible to suppress the content of the giving suggestion performance from greatly deviating from the actual state of the given points, and the total predicted by the player from the giving suggestion performance. It is possible to match or approximate the value with the actual total points.

Further, since the added result of the given points and the sub-points is used, even if the given points are 0 points, at least the numerical value of the sub-points can be secured as the directable points. Therefore, it is possible to execute the giving suggestion effect regardless of whether or not the given points are actually given at the giving opportunity, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the giving suggestion effect.

In addition, with regard to total points, newly awarded points are added to the sum of the initial awarded points and sub-points. Since it is configured to be derived from the value, as described above, it is possible to execute the total suggestive performance even in a situation where the actual total points are 0 points, and the frequency of the total suggestive performance can be preferably increased. becomes possible.

A configuration is adopted in which the size of the directable point is determined based on the size of the given point. Specifically, the larger the assigned points, the easier it is for a large sub-point to be derived, and the configuration is such that the point that can be produced tends to increase.

In the above configuration, the greater the granted points, the higher the frequency of the grant suggestion effect and the grant amount indicated by the grant suggestion performance. It is possible to suppress the divergence from the assigned points. In other words, the greater the amount of points granted or accumulated, the stronger the player's expectations will be aroused. It is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggestion effect while reflecting the amount and accumulated amount.

It is configured to derive sub-points at the start of the advantageous section. In this configuration, the sub-points are derived in accordance with the start timing of the advantageous section and are added to the given points to obtain the directable points. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggestion performance from the beginning of the advantageous section, and it is possible to progress the game in the advantageous section while suitably increasing the expectation of the player who expects to reach the privilege giving value. be possible.

Since the display control device 81 is configured to derive the sub-points, it is possible to increase the frequency of giving suggesting effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main control device 101 . In general, in the main control device 101, in view of the fact that countermeasures against fraud are strengthened compared to the display control device 81, in the present embodiment, general control for progressing the game, awarding of points, and the total Although the processing related to the player's profit, such as the control of awarding the privilege when the privilege awarding value is reached, is entrusted to the main controller 101, in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the main controller 101 will increase. . In such a situation, if the main control device 101 is configured to entrust the execution control of the provision suggestion effect and the sub-point derivation processing, there is a concern that the processing failure etc. will occur and the game will be hindered, but according to this configuration. If so, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Moreover, according to this configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the main controller 101 and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the suggestion effects while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, which is suitable for a game machine in which the main control device 101 has a limited memory capacity.

The performance possible points are updated by subtracting the effected points of the previously executed giving suggestion performance from the performance possible points, and the subsequent giving suggestion performance is executed based on the updated performance possible points.

As described with reference to FIG. 85, for example, in the configuration in which the provision suggestion effect is executed based on the number of points provided each time, the provision suggestion effect corresponding to the value smaller than the value provided at that time is done, the unused portion expires without further use. On the other hand, in this configuration, the unused points in the case where the giving suggestion performance of the given point that is smaller than the possible points is performed is left as a numerical value for executing the later giving suggestion performance, and it is wasted. is suppressed. In other words, since the points that were not used in the previous grant suggestion effect can be effectively used as the execution amount of the subsequent grant suggestion effect, it is possible to efficiently execute the grant suggestion effect for the given directable points. Become. Therefore, by applying the present configuration to the configuration in which the giving suggestion effect is executed on the premise that the point that can be given is greater than the actually given given point, the frequency of the giving suggestion effect can be more preferably increased. It becomes possible.

It is possible to set the effected points for each aspect of the provision suggestion effect (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect), and direct the effected points corresponding to the specific effect mode that was executed. It was configured to be subtracted from the points. Specifically, for each aspect of the provision suggestive effect, a unique effected point corresponding to the amount of provision indicated by each aspect (in other words, the degree of expectation of the player) is set.

When a plurality of modes are provided as the giving suggestion effect, the magnitude of the given points can be suggested depending on which mode the giving suggesting effect is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the effected point of the given suggestion effect is made to have a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the given suggestion effect after being executed and controlled based on the post-update possible point is given first. It will be selected regardless of the mode of the giving suggestion effect. As a result, there is a concern that the total points predicted by the player and the actual total points will deviate greatly from each additional suggestive effect, and that the player's trust in the additional suggestive effect will decrease.

In this regard, in the present configuration, since the effectable points of a magnitude corresponding to the preceding provision suggestion effect mode are subtracted from the effectable points, the subsequent provision suggestion effect is associated with the previous provision suggestion effect mode. Aspects can be selected. Therefore, the total points predicted by the player and the actual total points can be matched or brought close to each other based on the suggesting effects to be given each time. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the additional suggestive effect while preventing the player from losing confidence in the additional suggestive effect.

A configuration is adopted in which the mode of the subsequent giving suggestion performance is determined within the range of the performance possible points after the update. Specifically, among the plurality of modes of the suggesting effect to be added, the mode of the subsequent suggesting effect to be added is determined from the mode that is equal to or less than the possible point of effect at that time.

In the above configuration, since a mode corresponding to a value exceeding the point that can be produced at that time is excluded from the selection target, it is suppressed that the mode of the subsequent provision suggestive presentation is selected due to deviation from the actual total points. be. As a result, the total points predicted by the player and the actual total points can be matched or brought close to each other based on the suggesting effects to be given each time.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that the award suggesting effect is executed in a situation where the point awarding opportunity in the main controller 101 has not been established. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the present embodiment, a continuous effect is executed as a effect for notifying that the player has won the CZ game or the lottery for transition to the AT mode. The continuous performance is performed as a series of performances over a plurality of games, and is configured to notify whether or not a lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the like has been won in the final game.

Here, an example of continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example of a continuous effect performed over three games will be described.

A start effect is executed in a game (first game) in which a continuous effect is started. In this starting effect, as shown in FIG. 86(a), a girl character 251 and a text image 252 such as "If you can transform into a wizard, win" are displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. This start effect is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the start game of the continuous effect.

In the subsequent game, depending on whether or not the girl character 251 can transform into the wizard character 253, it is notified whether or not the lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the like has been won. Specifically, in the second game, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 displays an image of the process in which the girl character 251 transforms into the wizard character 253. FIG. Then, in the third game (the final game in the continuous effect), a result image indicating whether or not the transformation was successful is displayed, thereby informing the presence or absence of winning. At that time, if the transition to the CZ mode or the like has been won, an image of a magician character 253 that has successfully transformed is displayed as shown in FIG. 86(c1). On the other hand, if the transition to the CZ mode or the like has not been won, as shown in FIG. 86(c2), an image of the girl character 251 whose transformation has failed is displayed.

The above-described video presentation is merely an example of a presentation mode as a continuous presentation. Other modes may also be possible. Also, the number of games in the continuous effect is not limited to three games, and may be two games or four games.

When executing a success ending or winning ending continuous effect, the main controller 101 sets the number of precursor games based on winning the CZ mode or the like, and shifts to the precursor mode. When the mode is shifted to the portent mode, the transition to the CZ mode or the like is on standby until the number of remaining port games becomes zero. The display control device 81 performs control so as to execute the above-described continuous effect during the omen mode, that is, during the period in which the shift to the mode is on standby after winning the CZ mode or the like. For example, when the number of predictive games is set to 5 and the continuous performance of 3 games is executed, the continuous performance is started at the timing when the number of remaining games in the predictive mode becomes 3 games. As a result, it is possible to announce the winning of the CZ mode or the like in the final game of the omen mode. In the above case, in the two games before starting the continuous performance, performances other than the continuous performance such as the advance notice performance are executed, and so-called hype is performed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 in this embodiment will be described.

<Special role notification process>
A specific winning notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is executed in step S2305 of the start effect setting processing (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and more specifically, it is executed when a specific combination (so-called rare combination) is won. . The processing for notifying a special combination is to set processing for continuous effects for pseudo signs (continuous effects such as CZ mode for informing non-winning).

First, in step S6101, a chance production execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set a chance production as the production of the current game. In the chance effect, for example, the characters "Chance!!" FIG. 53(c)). It should be noted that the odds of winning the lottery for executing the chance effect may differ depending on the type of the specific combination, the game state, the set value, and the like.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6101 has been won. If the player wins, in step S6103, the chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

After execution of step S6103 or when a negative determination is made in step S6102 (when the chance effect execution lottery is not won), in step S6104, it is determined whether or not an omen command has been received as a command at the start of this time. do. The portent command is transmitted when the main controller 101 shifts to the portent mode, in other words, when the transition to the CZ mode or the like is won. The portent command includes information indicating the transition to the portent mode and information indicating the number of portent games.

If no portent command has been received, it is determined in step S6105 whether a portent flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 or not. The precursor flag is for the CPU 181 to recognize that the precursor mode is in progress, and is set when the precursor command is received, and cleared when the precursor mode ends.

If the portent flag is not set, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo portent mode is on. The pseudo omen mode is a mode for making the player expect that the transition has been made (in other words, the player has won the CZ mode or the like), although the transition to the omen mode has not actually occurred. A period of the pseudo sign mode is used to execute a continuous performance for informing non-winning such as CZ mode. As in the case of the precursor mode, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo precursor mode is often set to be greater than the number of games in the continuous effect. At that time, a stimulating effect (effect other than the continuous effect) is performed to make the player expect winning in the period before the start of the continuous effect. Although there is a difference in degree, this fanning effect is also performed during the period before the start of the continuous effect in the omen mode, so it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the omen mode and the pseudo omen mode. .

If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S6107 to perform a lottery for the pseudo portent mode. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 183b. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S6108, it is determined based on the result of processing in step S6107 whether or not the execution lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has not been won, the process for informing the special combination is terminated as it is, while if the lottery has been won, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode (the number of pseudo-prediction games) is performed in step S6109. In step S6110, the number of pseudo precursor games selected in step S6109 is set in the pseudo precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The pseudo precursor counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode, and is decremented by one for each game.

In step S6111, the number of games of continuous production is set to the continuous production counter provided in various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 191 to grasp the number of remaining games of the continuous effect. In step S6112, a pseudo flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a, and then the special combination notification process is terminated. In addition, if the affirmative determination is made in any of the above steps S6104 to S6106 (if the portent command is received, or if either the portent flag or the pseudo flag is set), a continuous effect for the portent or , in order to avoid duplication of the continuous effect for the pseudo sign that has already been executed, the process after step S6107 is skipped, and the specific combination notification process is terminated.

<Start effect setting processing>
A special combination notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this embodiment, a continuous effect setting process of step S6201 is provided after step S4609 (FIG. 73). The continuous effect setting process is for performing settings for executing the continuous effect.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process in step S6201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the current start command. If the precursor command has been received, the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 in step S6302. In step S6303, the number of games of continuous effect is set to the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b.

After execution of step S6303 or when a negative determination is made in step S6301 (when the precursor command is not received), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM183. The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed. If the continuous effect flag is set, that is, if the continuous effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6305, and the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1 and updated.

On the other hand, if the continuous effect flag is not set, that is, if the continuous effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S6306 whether or not it is time to execute the continuous effect (start timing). If it is not the execution timing of the continuous effect, this continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is, while if it is the execution timing of the continuous effect, in step S6307, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a.

After execution of step S6305 or step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not a pseudo flag is set in the flag storage area 183a. If the pseudo flag is not set, that is, if the situation is such that the continuous effect for the portent is to be executed, the process advances to step S6309 to set the effect data for the continuous effect for the portent. In this step, the value of the continuous effect counter is referred to ascertain what game the current game corresponds to in the continuous effect, and the effect data corresponding to the grasped game is set. For example, in the case of the first game, the above-described effect data for the start effect is set, and in the case of the final game, the effect data for the result image in which transformation is successful is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6308 (if the pseudo flag is set), the flow advances to step S6310 to set the effect data of the continuous effect for the pseudo sign. In this step as well, the value of the continuous performance counter is referred to ascertain what game the current game corresponds to in the continuous performance, and the performance data corresponding to the grasped game is set. At that time, if the final game of the continuous effect is grasped, the effect data of the result video in which the transformation fails is set.

After execution of step S6309 or step S6310, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S6311. When the continuous effect counter is 0, at step S6312, the continuous effect flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

In step S6313, it is determined whether or not a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the pseudo flag is set, the pseudo flag is cleared in step S6314, and the pseudo precursor end flag is set in the flag storage area 183a in step S6315. The pseudo omen end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect for the pseudo omen is finished. After execution of step S6315, if negative determination is made in step S6311 (if the continuous effect counter is not 0) or if negative determination is made in step S6313 (if the pseudo flag is not set), this continuous effect setting process is terminated. .

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90(a). The process shown in FIG. 90(a) is provided as a process to be executed when a negative determination is made in step S2421 (FIG. 49) in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 76) according to the fifth embodiment. It is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2421 (neither the first BB end command nor the second BB end command has been received), the flow advances to step S6401 to determine whether the pseudo precursory end flag is set in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. determine whether or not As described above, the pseudo omen end flag is set in the final game in the continuous production for the pseudo omen. It determines whether or not there is

If the pseudo sign end flag is set, after clearing the pseudo sign end flag in step S6402, it is determined in step S6403 whether or not the current point that can be produced is a predetermined value (for example, 5) or more. do. This process is for determining whether or not the number of points sufficient to execute the giving suggestion effect is secured as the current effectable points.

When the possible effect point is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S6404, and the type lottery table corresponding to the end of the continuous effect for the pseudo sign is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM182. This type table is a table for performing both a performance execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the giving suggestion performance and a type lottery for lottery for the type (mode) in the case of executing the giving suggestion performance. That is, in the present embodiment, at the end of the continuous effect that ends in failure, although the main control device 101 does not give points, the display control device 81 is configured to independently execute the giving suggestion effect. It is

In the type lottery table for the end of the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. Similar to the type lottery table A according to the fifth embodiment, it is set lower than the other type lottery tables B to F. Also, when execution of the giving suggesting effect is selected, sorting by type is performed within the range of possible effect points at that point in the same manner as in the type lottery table A according to the fifth embodiment. For example, if the point that can be produced at that time is 10 points, the large bubble effect and the extra large bubble effect with the already produced point exceeding 10 points are excluded from the selection, and the small bubble effect with the already produced point of 5 points is excluded. , and an effect in a bubble with 10 already-produced points.

After acquiring the type lottery table in step S6404, in step S6405, a type lottery for lottery for the type of point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, the type lottery for the provision suggestion effect is performed based on the type lottery table obtained above and the lottery counters (random numbers) obtained from the various counter areas 183 b of the RAM 183 .

At step S6406, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the effect suggesting addition of the type selected by lottery at step S6405 is executed. In step S6407, the provision suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The provision suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the provision suggestion effect should be executed. When the provision suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processing of step S2211 in the presentation setting process (FIG. 47), the provision suggestion presentation in the lottery mode is executed based on the set presentation data. The corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the above-mentioned addition suggesting effect is executed at the end of the final game in the continuous effect for the pseudo omen (when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped). At that time, the addition suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

After step S6407 is executed, in step S6408, the effected points corresponding to the lottery result of the effect type are grasped and subtracted from the current effectable points. In step S6409, the result of the subtraction is stored as a new effectable point in the effectable point storage area 183e, and the effectable point is updated. After the execution of step S6409, if a negative determination is made in step S6401 (if the pseudo sign end flag is not set) or if a negative determination is made in step S6403 (if the production possible point is less than a predetermined value), step Proceeding to S2423, other all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the point that can be produced is used to provide an opportunity to execute the giving suggestion production at the end of the continuous production for the pseudo omen. It is structured to provide opportunities for execution of The configuration for that will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91(a). The process of FIG. 91(a) is provided as a process to be executed when a negative determination is made in step S2403 (FIG. 49) in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 76) according to the fifth embodiment. is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 (if the CZ end command has not been received), in step S6501 it is determined whether the first AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 38) has been received as the current command for all stop judge. If the first AT start command has been received, the processing of steps S6502 to S6508 is executed. These processes are the same as steps S6403 to S6409 in FIG. 90(a), and are for executing the addition suggestion effect.

However, in step S6503 for acquiring the type lottery table, instead of the type lottery table for ending the continuous effect, the type lottery table corresponding to the start of the first AT mode is acquired. In the lottery table for the start of the 1st AT, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the probability of execution of the giving suggestion effect is set to 50% (probability of non-execution is 50%), and the end of the continuous effect It is set higher than the time type lottery table and the type lottery tables A to F associated with the grant opportunity. The reason why such a high execution probability is set is that the privilege granted when the privilege grant value is reached is to shift (promote) to the second AT mode after the end of the first AT mode. By positively performing the giving and suggesting performance at the start of the mode, the player can play the first AT mode with a high expectation for the shift to the second AT mode, and enjoy the game in the first AT mode more. This is because it is considered that

Note that the above-described type effect table including the one for ending the continuous effect is merely an example, and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, a common execution probability is used for the end of the continuous effect and the start of the first AT, or the probability of executing the effect for the start of the first AT is set lower than that for the end of the continuous effect, and so on. can be set arbitrarily.

If a negative determination is made in step S6501 (if the first AT start command has not been received), the process advances to step S6502 to determine whether the second AT start command (step S1608 in FIG. 40) has been received as the current all-stop command. determine whether or not If the second AT start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2408 (second AT mode start effect setting process), and if the second AT start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2409 (first AT end processing for determining whether or not a command has been received).

<About the flow of the giving suggestion production>
The flow of the additional suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described. Description of the flow similar to that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

As in the case of FIG. 84, it is assumed that no points are awarded on the main controller 101 side and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side at the award opportunity a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the production possible points of the display control device 81 are 20 points, which are the sum of these points. Then, it is assumed that a small bubble effect is selected as the provision suggesting effect at the above-described provision opportunity a1 (phenomenon a2). In this case, 5 effected points corresponding to the small bubble effect are subtracted from 20 effectable points, and the effectable points are updated to 15 points.

After that, if the continuous effect for the pseudo sign (FIG. 86) is executed before the giving opportunity b1, the pseudo sign end flag is set in the final game. As a result, the type lottery for the giving suggestion performance is executed at the end of the final game, although it is not the opportunity to give the given points in the main control device 101 . This type lottery serves both as whether or not to execute the provision suggestion effect and to select a mode in the case of execution. In addition, in this type lottery, the type of giving suggestive effect is selected within the range of possible directable points at that time, and specifically, the already produced points are equal to or less than the possible directable points (15 points). Only the small bubble effect and medium bubble effect are selected (FIG. 78(b)), and the other large bubble effect and extra large bubble effect are not selected.

As a result of the lottery, if the effect in bubbles is selected, the effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like at the end of the final game. Also, the effected points (10 points) corresponding to the bubble effect are subtracted from the effectable points (15 points) at that time, and the effectable points are updated to 5 points.

After that, when 10 points are given by the main controller 101 at the giving opportunity b1, the given points are added to the possible production points, and the possible production points are updated to 15 points. For this reason, at the grant opportunity b1, the type lottery of the grant suggestion performance is executed with 15 points as possible performance points.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the provision suggesting performance is executed when it is not a point provision opportunity, the frequency of execution of the provision suggestion performance can be increased without increasing the point provision opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the willingness to continue the game by increasing the frequency of the provision suggestion effect while suppressing the reduction in the level of the privilege due to the increase in the provision opportunity.

Further, the execution control of the giving suggestion effect in that case is configured to be performed based on the effect possible points. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggesting effect while corresponding to the actual total points, rather than just increasing the frequency of the giving suggesting effect unnecessarily.

The configuration is such that the giving suggestion performance when it is not the giving opportunity is performed in accordance with the execution of the continuous performance for the pseudo omen. In the continuous effect, the presence or absence of the winning of the CZ mode or the like is notified, so when the continuous effect is performed, it is assumed that the player is watching the effect with high interest. In this configuration, since the addition suggestive performance is executed in accordance with the execution of the continuous performance, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the additional suggestive performance and to effectively increase the interest in the points.

In addition, in this configuration, the additional suggestive effect is performed in correspondence with the continuous effect for the pseudo-prediction, not the continuous effect for the predictive effect. For example, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the given suggestion effect will increase even by a configuration in which the given suggestion effect is performed in correspondence with the continuous effect for the omen. If the mode and execution timing of the given suggestion effect are not well adjusted based on this, the effect of the given suggestion effect cannot be properly exhibited, or the beginning of the CZ mode etc. becomes ambiguous and causes confusion for the player. I have concerns. In this regard, according to the present configuration, such troublesome adjustment is not necessary, so that it is possible to increase the attention to the additional suggestive effect while suppressing an increase in labor for designing the effect.

Since the display control device 81 performs the execution control of the continuous performance of the pseudo omen, the provision suggestion performance is executed in accordance with the end of the performance, so the main control is performed when the provision suggestion performance is not given. The contribution of the device 101 can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the additional suggestion effect while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main controller 101 . Moreover, according to this configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the main controller 101 and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the suggestion effects while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, which is suitable for a game machine in which the main control device 101 has a limited memory capacity.

<Seventh Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that a high probability mode is provided in which the execution probability of the additional suggestion effect is high. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92 . This process is executed in place of the effect setting process at all stop of FIG. 76(c) according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 92, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 76(c), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (if the second AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S4709 whether or not a point trigger command has been received as the current all-stop command. As already explained, in the fifth embodiment, when 200 games, 400 games, or 600 games have been completed, the main controller 101 is configured to provide a point giving opportunity. , it is determined whether or not the opportunity for giving them has been established.

If the point trigger command has been received, the process advances to step S4710 to set the corresponding trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined which of the 200 game addiction, 400 game addiction, and 600 game addiction has been established as the award trigger. Then, if the 200th game is addicted, the trigger flag B is set, if the 400th game is addicted, the trigger flag C is set, and if the 600th game is addicted, the trigger flag D is set (FIG. 75(b)). .

In step S7101, it is determined whether or not the current effectable points stored in the effectable point storage area 183e of the RAM 183 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 5). If the production possible points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process advances to step S7102 to perform a high-probability mode transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the high-probability mode. The high-probability mode is a mode in which it is easier to win the execution lottery for the provision suggestion performance and the execution frequency of the performance is increased compared to the normal mode (low-probability mode). In this step, a transition lottery table for the high probability mode is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and based on the acquired lottery table and lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, the lottery is executed. process.

In the high-probability mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the rate of transition to the high-probability mode is set corresponding to the number of casual games. Specifically, the transition rate to the high-probability mode is set to 5% in the case of addicted to 200 games and 400 games, and the transition rate is set to 10% in the case of addicted to 600 games. Note that the above transition rate is merely an example, and its specific numerical value can be set arbitrarily.

In step S7103, based on the processing result of step S7102, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode transition lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process advances to step S7104 to set effect data for the high-probability mode. When the high-probability mode is in effect, a dedicated effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that points are likely to be given, and the above effect data is for executing the dedicated effect. . It should be noted that, as a notification that points are likely to be given, for example, it is conceivable to display characters such as "high probability of points".

In step S7105, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The high-probability flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the high-probability mode is in progress. Therefore, by setting the high-probability flag, the execution lottery mode of the provision suggestion effect shifts to the high-probability mode.

Also, when the high probability flag is set, in the other processing of step S2211 in the production setting process (FIG. 47), based on the production data set above, so that the production for the high probability mode is executed. It controls corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64). In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the effect for the high-probability mode is executed from the start of the next game.

After execution of step S7105, if a negative determination is made in step S7101 (if the point that can be produced is less than a predetermined value) or if a negative determination is made in step S7103 (if the high probability mode transition lottery is not won), step S7106 In step S2423, the processing for addition suggestion effect is executed, and then other effect setting processing at the time of all stop is executed in step S2423.

<Addition suggestion effect processing>
The addition suggestion effect processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94 . This processing is performed in step S4608 (FIG. 73), step S4703 (FIG. 76(a)), step S4708 (FIG. 76(b)) and step S7106 (FIG. 92). In FIG. 94, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the addition suggestion effect processing of FIG. 77, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After execution of step S4803 (updating of points that can be produced) or when a negative determination is made in step S4801 (when points are not given), a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 in step S7201. determine whether or not there is If the high-probability flag is not set, that is, if the high-probability mode is not in effect, the processing from step S4804 (FIG. 77) is executed. On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set, the process advances to step S7202 to determine whether or not the current point that can be produced is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 5).

If the current point that can be produced is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the type lottery table for the high probability mode is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 in step S7203. In the type lottery table for the high-probability mode, as shown in FIG. getting higher. Further, the distribution probability for each type is set to 30% for each of the small bubble effect to the large bubble effect, and to 10% for the extra large bubble effect.

In step S7204, the type lottery for the provision suggestion effect is performed based on the type lottery table acquired in step S7203 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. At that time, whether to select one of the small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, and extra large bubble effect is within the range of possible effect points, as in the case of the effect type lottery in step S4806 (Fig. 77). do in For example, if the point that can be produced at that time is 10 points, the large bubble effect and the extra large bubble effect with the already produced point exceeding 10 points are excluded from the selection, and the small bubble effect with the already produced point of 5 points is excluded. , and an effect in a bubble with 10 already-produced points. In this case, the 30% allocated to the large bubble effect and the 10% allocated to the extra large bubble effect are replaced with the small bubble effect with the minimum effected points, and the small bubble effect is 70% and the medium bubble effect is changed. A type lottery is performed by allocating the performance to 30%.

Note that the above-described type lottery table for the high-probability mode is merely an example, and is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, the execution probability of the additional suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be 100%, and may be less than 100% as long as it is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily set the sorting probabilities for each type.

After executing step S7204, the processing of steps S7205 to S7208 is executed. Since these processes are the same as steps S4807 to S4811 in the process for adding suggestion effect in FIG. 77, description thereof is omitted.

After execution of step S7208, in step S7209, it is determined whether or not the point giving opportunity of this time is the first opportunity after shifting to the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, since the same game triggers the transition to the high-probability mode and the point-giving opportunity, the processing of this step is the game for transition to the high-probability mode. It can also be said that it determines whether or not

If it is not the first opportunity, a continuation lottery for the high probability mode is performed in step S7210. In the continuation lottery, lottery processing is performed using lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b after setting the probability of continuation of the high probability mode to a predetermined probability (for example, 70%). In step S7211, it is determined whether or not the continuation lottery is won based on the processing result of step S7210. If the continuation lottery is won, the high probability mode is continued, and the processing for this giving suggestion effect is terminated. In addition, even if it is the first trigger in step S7209, the processing for step S7210 and step S7211 is skipped and the present process for addition suggestion effect is ended in order to continue the high probability mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S7211 (when the continuation lottery is not won), in step S7212, the high probability flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared. This ends the high probability mode and shifts to the normal mode. Also, if the production possible points are not equal to or greater than the predetermined value in step S7202, the process proceeds to step S7212 to clear the high probability flag. That is, when the production possible points are insufficient, the high probability mode is terminated. After execution of step S7212, this process for addition suggestion effect|presentation is complete|finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the high probability mode is made in which the execution probability of the addition suggestion effect is increased. In the high-probability mode, since the frequency of giving suggestion performance is increased, the player's expectation for the total points reaching the privilege giving value is heightened, and the player's desire to continue the game can be favorably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the configuration in which this embodiment is applied to the above fifth embodiment has been described, but this embodiment can also be applied to the above sixth embodiment. In such a configuration, when the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the execution probability of the giving suggestion effect in the case where the giving opportunity is not given is also higher than in the case of the normal mode.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, a total point (numerical information to be referred to when executing a total suggestive effect) is derived from the total value of the points given on the main control device 101 side and the sub-points on the display control device 81 side. However, in the present embodiment, the total points are derived based on the effected points on the display control device 81 side. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Start effect setting processing>
The start effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (FIG. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed instead of the effect setting process at the start of FIG. In FIG. 95, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 73, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the start effect setting process of FIG. 73 according to the fifth embodiment, a process of storing the addition result of the given points and the sub points as the total points is provided in step S4606, but this embodiment is provided. Such a process is not provided in the effect setting process at the start of FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, after storing the addition result of the granted points and the sub-points as the effectable points in step S4605, the process proceeds to step S4607 to store various flags in the RAM 183 without executing the storage processing of the total points. Trigger flag A is set in area 183a. The opportunity flag A indicates that the current point award opportunity is based on the start of the advantageous section.

After execution of step S4607, in step S8101, a process for addition suggestion effect for executing a provision suggestion effect is executed. In subsequent step S8102, a total suggestive effect process for executing a total suggestive effect is executed, and thereafter, in step S2315, other start time effect setting process is executed.

<Addition suggestion effect processing>
The addition suggestion effect processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is performed in step S8101 (FIG. 95), step S4703 (FIG. 76(a)), step S4708 (FIG. 76(b)) and step S4711 (FIG. 76(c)). In addition, in FIG. 96, the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as the addition suggestion effect processing of FIG. 77, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After execution of step S4803 (update of possible production points) or when a negative determination is made in step S4801 (when points are not given), the current production possible points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 5) in step S4804. Determine whether or not This process determines whether or not the current effectable points are at a level at which the giving suggestion effect can be executed. If the production possible points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process advances to step S8201 to acquire the type lottery table corresponding to the current production possible points from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, a plurality of tables corresponding to the number of points that can be produced are set as the type lottery table of the giving suggestion production. Get the one corresponding to the total points of . In the lottery table for each type shown in FIG. 97, 6 points to 10 points, 11 points to 20 points, and 21 points or more are set as classifications of possible production points. is set to be higher. Regarding the sorting of types when the execution of the addition suggesting effect is selected, it is within the range of effectable points at that point in time, as in the case of step S4806 in the fifth embodiment. For example, when the point that can be produced at that time is 10 points, the type of suggested effect to be given is selected from a small bubble effect with 5 points already produced and a medium bubble effect with 10 already produced points. is selected.

Various numerical values in the type lottery table of FIG. 97 are only examples, and are not limited to those shown. In addition, the division of production possible points may be two divisions or four or more divisions.

After acquiring the type lottery table in step S8201, in step S8202, a type lottery for lottery for the type of point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, based on the obtained type lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, the effect type lottery for the provision suggestion effect is performed. After that, in step S4807, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the addition suggestion effect of the type selected by lottery in step S8202 is executed. In step S4808, a provision suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and in step S4809, the effected points corresponding to the lottery result of the effect type are grasped. For example, when the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are grasped as effect completed points.

In step S4810, the effected points grasped in step S4809 are subtracted from the current effectable points. In step S4811, the result of the subtraction is stored as a new effectable point in the effectable point storage area 183e, and the effectable point is updated.

After execution of step S4811, in step S8203, the effected points grasped in step S4809 are added to the current total points. For example, in a situation where the total points at that time are 10 points, if 5 points are grasped as the current effected points, 15 points are derived as the addition result. If the total points at that point are 0 points, the present effected points ascertained in step S4809 will be the added result.

In step S8204, the addition result derived in step S8203 is stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183 as a new total point. That is, in the present embodiment, the total points are derived from the cumulative added value of the effected points. After execution of step S8204 or when a negative determination is made in step S4804 (when the point that can be produced is less than the predetermined value), this process for giving suggestion production is ended.

<Total Suggestion Effect Processing>
The processing for total suggestion effect in step S8102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S8301, it is determined whether or not the suggested effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The suggesting effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the suggesting effect to be given should be executed. If the suggestive effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8302, and an effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not the total suggestive effect is to be executed. In this step, an execution lottery table for total suggestive effect is acquired from various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and the lottery is performed based on the lottery table and lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b of RAM 183. .

In step S8303, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S8302. If the player wins, the process advances to step S8304 to determine whether or not the total value (total points) of points granted by the main controller 101 is equal to or greater than the privilege grant value (20 points). If the total points are not equal to or greater than the specific given value, the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183 are grasped in step S8305. In step S8306, the type lottery table corresponding to the grasped total points is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. FIG. As the type lottery table acquired in this case, the same one as the type lottery table (FIG. 82) acquired in step S4908 of the total suggestion effect process (FIG. 80) according to the fifth embodiment can be used. can. That is, the table corresponding to the current total points is acquired from among a plurality of tables set according to the number of total points.

Here, in the present embodiment, the cumulative added value of the effected points is used as the total points. That is, since the type of the total suggestive performance is selected based on the total of the produced points, the result of the added suggestive performance performed before the total suggestive performance can be reflected in the type of the total suggestive performance. Since the total points are initialized when the total points are initialized, the accumulated added value is the accumulated added value of the effected points corresponding to the provision suggesting effect executed after the initialization.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S8304, in step S8307, the type lottery table for arrival corresponding to the case where the total points are equal to or greater than the specific grant value is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. In this type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 99, the selection probability of each effect mode (light emission color of the upper lamp 63) in the total suggestive effect is set in association with the number of executions of the additional suggestive effect.

For example, if the number of executions of the given suggestion effect is 0, the probability of blue is set to 0%, the probability of yellow is set to 0%, the probability of green is set to 20%, and the probability of red is set to 80%. ing. Also, if the number of executions of the given suggestion effect is 1 or more, the probability of blue is set to 10%, the probability of yellow is set to 30%, the probability of green is set to 30%, and the probability of red is set to 30%. It is That is, when the suggesting effect to be added is not executed, a higher level effect mode is more likely to be selected than when the effect to be added suggesting is being executed. When the giving suggestion effect is not executed, the player tends to get the impression that the points are not accumulated, and it is assumed that the player does not expect to reach the privilege giving value. By executing the high-ranking total suggestive effect indicating that the accumulated amount of points is large, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's surprise and joy.

Note that the above type lottery table is merely an example, and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, if the number of executions of the given suggestion effect is 0, the probability of turning red may be 100%. The selection probability may be changed based on the number of times other than 0, such as making it easier to select the highest performance mode. Further, as long as a high-ranking performance mode is likely to be selected, the total suggestive effect may be randomly selected with a uniform selection probability regardless of the number of executions of the added suggestive effect.

After execution of step S8306 or step S8307, in step S8308, based on the obtained type lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, the type lottery for the total suggestion effect is performed. In step S8309, setting processing of the effect data is performed so that the total suggestive effect of the type selected by lottery in step S8308 is executed.

In step S8310, a total suggestion flag is set in various flag storage area 183a of RAM183. The total suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this way, in other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47), based on the set effect data, the lottery mode total suggestion effect is executed. The corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

After the execution of step S8310, if the affirmative determination is made in step S8301 (if the suggested effect flag is set) or if the negative determination is made in step S8303 (if the effect execution lottery is not won), this total suggested effect end the processing.

<About the flow of total suggestive production>
The flow of the total suggestion production will be explained. Since the flow of the total suggestive effect differs depending on whether the total value of the points (total points) given by the main controller 101 is less than the privilege giving value and when it is equal to or more than the privilege giving value, here, first, The flow in the former case will be described with reference to FIG.

It is assumed that no points are awarded on the main control device 101 side and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side at the award opportunity a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the production possible points of the display control device 81 are 20 points, which are the sum of these points. Then, if a small bubble effect with 5 already-produced points is selected as the giving suggestion effect at the giving opportunity a1 (phenomenon a2), the total points are 5 points.

Therefore, when the lottery for execution of the total suggestive effect is won until the next giving opportunity b1, the lottery for the type of the total suggestive effect is performed with the total points being 5 points. Specifically, a table for less than 24 points (FIG. 82) is obtained as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect, and either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the total suggestive effect type.

Supposing that the effect in bubbles with 10 points of effected points is selected at the next giving opportunity b1 (phenomenon b2), 5 points which is the total points at that time and 10 points which are the effected points of the effect in bubbles. are added, and the total points become 15 points. Further, if the effect in bubbles with 10 points of effected points is selected at the next granting opportunity c1 (phenomenon c2), the total points at that time of 15 points and the effected points of the effect in bubbles A certain 10 points are added, and the total points become 25 points.

In this case, if the execution lottery for the total suggestive performance is won before the next giving opportunity, the lottery for the type of the total suggestive performance is carried out with the total points set to 25 points. Specifically, a table for 25 points to 39 points (FIG. 82) is obtained as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect, and either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the total suggestive effect type. At this time, yellow light emission is more likely to be selected than when the total points are less than 24 points, and it is more likely to be suggested that the total points are increasing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total point is derived based on the effected points corresponding to the selected provision suggesting effect, and the lottery for the type of the total suggesting effect is performed based on it. In the type lottery of the total suggestive performance, the total points and the performance mode of the total suggestive performance are not corresponded one-to-one, but are made to correspond in a one-to-many relationship, and the performance mode is selected from a plurality of options. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a total suggestive effect in correspondence with the additional suggestive effect actually shown to the player. Therefore, the impression received by the player from each given suggestive effect (in other words, the total points predicted by the player from each given suggestive effect) can be brought closer to the effect mode of the total suggested effect, and both can be matched. It will be possible to make it easier to

Next, the flow of the total suggestive effect when the total value of points (total points) given by the main controller 101 is greater than or equal to the privilege given value will be described. Here, it is assumed that points are not given on the main controller 101 side at the giving opportunity a1, and the giving suggesting effect is not executed.

After 20 points are given on the side of the main controller 101 at the giving opportunity b1, and the total points become equal to or more than the privilege giving value, the lottery for execution of the total suggestion performance is won until the next giving opportunity c1. , the type lottery table (FIG. 99) for arrival time is acquired as the type lottery table for the total suggestive effect. This type lottery table selects the production mode of the total suggestive production regardless of the total points at that time, and the production is higher than the type lottery table when the total points are less than the privilege grant value. It is easy to select the aspect. In other words, when the total points become equal to or greater than the privilege grant value, the type selection corresponding to the total points is performed irrespective of the effect suggesting granting shown so far.

In the configuration (the configuration described with reference to FIG. 100) in which execution control of the total suggestive effect is performed based on the total point derived by cumulatively adding the effected points, the effect of the given suggestive effect each time and the effect of the total suggestive effect On the other hand, in a situation where the total points are small due to the fact that the giving suggestion effect is not executed or the number of times is small, even if the total points reach the privilege giving value, the total There arises a problem that the total suggestive presentation corresponding to the increase in accumulated points cannot be performed. In this case, even though the privilege grant value has been reached, the player is not notified of it, and as a result, expectations are not well aroused, and there is a concern that the player will quit the game.

In this respect, by adding this configuration, even if the total point accumulation amount is small because the giving suggestion effect is not executed or the number of times is small, the total point accumulation amount increases. It is possible to perform a total suggestive production corresponding to the presence of the user. That is, while making it easy to link the giving suggestive effect of each round and the effect mode of the total suggestive effect, when the total points reach a certain level or more, the player's expectation that the total points are increasing. is suitably aroused, and it becomes possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since a plurality of types are provided in the provision suggesting effect corresponding to the provision of points, it is possible to suggest the amount of points to be provided depending on which type the provision suggesting effect is performed. Further, a total suggesting effect is performed as a notification corresponding to the total points separately from the provision suggesting effect, and the total points can be suggested depending on the type of the total suggesting effect. By executing both of these notifications, the player can recognize that the total points will increase toward the privilege award value, and will be motivated to further increase the points. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Under such a configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the provision suggestion effect is performed through the execution lottery, there are cases where the provision suggestion effect is not performed even if points are actually provided on the main control unit 101 side. Although the total points should not be accumulated so much from the suggestive performance, the total points predicted by the player from the given suggestive performance and the total points predicted from the total suggestive performance, such as suggesting a large total point in the total suggestive performance. A situation can arise in which there is a large divergence between In this case, the player may be confused as to which suggestive effect to trust. In this regard, in this configuration, the type of the suggested effect given previously, that is, the type of the total suggested effect is determined based on the results of the given suggested effect, so the total points suggested by the total suggested effect are given. It is possible to match or approximate the predicted total value from the suggestive effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

A lottery for execution of the giving suggestion performance is performed based on the performance possible points at that time, and the larger the performance possible points, the more easily the giving suggestion performance is executed. When the number of points that can be produced increases, the frequency of execution of the suggested production is low even though the actual total points are large, or the type of suggested production that can be provided is biased toward the type corresponding to the small points. As a result, it is assumed that the surplus of the points that can be produced becomes large. In such a case, it is preferable to actively encourage the player to continue playing in order to prevent the player from losing money by quitting the game. In this regard, in this configuration, the greater the number of points that can be produced, the easier it is to execute the giving suggestion effect. By increasing the performance of the given suggestive effect, it becomes easier to report a large value as the total suggestive effect. In other words, in situations where it is assumed that the actual total points are greater than the total value predicted from the given suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the frequency of the given suggestion performance or increase the total points suggested by the total suggestion performance. Become.

When the total points become equal to or greater than a predetermined value (privilege grant value), the type of the total suggestive effect is determined regardless of the performance of the imparted suggestive effect. For example, when a large number of points are awarded in one grant opportunity, the total points increase rapidly. In this case, there is a concern that the performance of the given suggestive effect tends to be insufficient for the increased total points, and only a small value can be reported in the total suggestive effect. In this regard, in this configuration, depending on the situation, the type of the total suggestion effect can be determined regardless of the performance of the suggestion effect to be given, so even if the performance of the suggestion effect to be given is poor, it is possible to notify a large value in the total suggestion effect. be possible. Therefore, it is possible to suitably deal with a case where the total points suddenly increase.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege when the total points reach the privilege award value is the transition to the second AT mode. It is not particularly limited as long as it can be an opportunity to accumulate the total points). For example, if the granted points have not reached the privilege granted value, the second AT mode transition lottery is not performed at the end of the first AT mode, while if the total points have reached the privilege granted value, the privilege Alternatively, the second AT mode transition lottery may be performed at the end of the first AT mode. In this case, the winning probability in the transition lottery may be the same as the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first AT mode (the second AT mode transition lottery that is performed when a specific role in the first AT mode is won), A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the second AT mode is increased by giving preferential treatment to the transition lottery during the first AT mode.

Also, even in a situation where the total points have not reached the privilege award value, the second AT mode transition lottery may be performed at the end of the first AT mode. In this case, the probability of winning in the second AT mode transition lottery when the total points reach the privilege grant value is more favorable than the second AT mode transition lottery when the total points do not reach the privilege grant value. should be

Further, as a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value, the pullback in the first AT mode may be preferentially treated. Specifically, when or after the first AT mode ends with the total points reaching the privilege grant value, the mode (retraction zone) in which the expectation of the transition to the first AT mode is high, The mode is configured to continue for a predetermined number of games or until a predetermined termination condition (such as winning a drop lottery) is established. As a mode in which the expectation of transition to the 1st AT mode is high, the pullback of the 1st AT mode is confirmed, the 1st AT mode transition lottery is performed every game regardless of whether or not a small role is won, and the normal mode In the special zone, the winning combination that does not trigger the transition to the 1st AT mode becomes the trigger for the transition in the pullback special zone, and the probability of winning the 1st AT mode for each winning combination is higher than in the normal mode (Fig. 29). A configuration such as setting is conceivable.

Also, even if the first AT mode ends in a state in which the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, it is possible to shift to the withdrawal zone of the first AT mode, and the total points have reached the privilege grant value. When the first AT mode ends in the state of being present, the probability of transition to the first AT mode (retraction probability) in the retraction zone may be preferentially treated as compared to the case of not reaching the first AT mode.

Further, instead of or in addition to the pullback of the first AT mode, when or after the second AT mode ends, it may be configured to shift to a mode (retraction zone) in which the expectation of transition to the second AT mode is high. In this case, the transition to the pullback zone of the second AT mode may be a privilege, and even if the second AT mode ends before the total points reach the privilege award value, the transition to the pullback zone of the second AT mode may be made. If the second AT mode ends with the total points reaching the privilege grant value, the probability of transition to the second AT mode in the pull-back zone (the pull-back probability ) may be preferentially treated.

In addition, as a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value, the number of games in the first AT mode or the second AT mode may be added, or the number of sets may be added. good.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the point awarding opportunity is not provided during the first AT mode, but the point awarding opportunity is provided during the first AT mode so that the total points can be increased after the first AT mode is started. may be In this case, even if the first AT mode is started in a state where the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, the total points can be increased to the privilege grant value while playing the first AT mode. The first AT mode can be played with one of the goals of reaching the target, and it is possible to expand the range of ways to enjoy the first AT mode. In addition, as a configuration provided for the point grant opportunity in the first AT mode, for example, a configuration that can shift to a special mode that is advantageous when winning a specific role (for example, a special zone where the addition of the number of AT games is preferentially treated) On top of that, a configuration is conceivable in which points are given by the main controller 101 when a player wins a special role but does not win the special mode transition lottery.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section was exemplified as the specific state, but a game state other than the advantageous section may be used as the specific state as long as the total points are initialized when a predetermined condition is established. In this case, the total points may be initialized when the game state other than the advantageous section ends, or the total points may be initialized when an initialization condition other than the end of the state is satisfied.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section. It may be configured to be

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the initial value when the total points are initialized is 0 points, but it may be 1 or more, which is less than the total points before initialization. Since the initialization process can be regarded as a process of reducing the total points, the initialization process may be called a reduction process.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provided the reduction opportunity which reduces a total point aside from initialization. For example, in the case of initialization, the total points will be 0 points, but in the reduction process, a predetermined value is subtracted from the total points at that time to decrease the total points. In that case, the retention points may be retained both during the execution of the initialization process and during the execution of the reduction process. may be configured not to hold holding points, or vice versa.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized when the advantageous section ends, but the total points may be initialized after the advantageous section ends. Specifically, in the second section display process (FIG. 45), the advantageous section flag may be cleared and then the total points may be initialized. Also, the above initialization may be performed in the next game after the advantageous section ends.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the total points may not be initialized even when the advantageous section ends. That is, when the total points reach the privilege award value, when power is cut off (when power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 or when the power switch 71 of the slot machine 10 is turned off), or when a manual operation (RAM The total points may not be initialized except when the data in the RAM 106 is erased by a clear operation).

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the first AT mode is configured as a pseudo-bonus, but the first AT mode may not be a pseudo-bonus.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the second AT mode is performed via the first AT mode. It is good also as a structure which obtains.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of point awarding opportunities are provided in the main control unit 101, but the number of such opportunities does not need to be plural. may be

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the point awarding opportunity is established when a situation undesirable to the player occurs, but the establishment condition of the awarding opportunity is not limited to this. For example, when a specific pattern combination such as a chance eye is stopped on the reels 32L to 32R, the above-mentioned awarding opportunity is established, or when a predetermined combination is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to award points, and the lottery is won. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the provision opportunity is established when the

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which points are more likely to be awarded at the point awarding opportunity (previous point awarding opportunity) at the start of the advantageous section than later or later awarding opportunities. good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of awarding points is set to 70% for the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous section, and the awarding probability is set to 40% for the point awarding opportunity when addicted to 200 games. With such a configuration, in the first to fourth embodiments, the period until the current total points catch up with the held points can be shortened, and the execution of the point effect is restricted. Prolongation of the period of the state can be suppressed. In addition, in the above fifth to eighth embodiments, it is possible to start the advantageous section by increasing the number of points that can be produced. It can be made to function as an opportunity for the player who has continued the game to wait and see to continue the game.

In addition, it is possible to configure the point award not to be triggered by the start of the advantageous section. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the given points are more likely to be given than at subsequent giving occasions.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which larger points are more likely to be awarded at the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous section than at later or later awarding opportunities. For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments, in the point granting opportunity at the start of the advantageous section, the probability of granting 3 or more points is higher than the probability of granting 2 or less points. While it is high, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the opposite is the case when the points are given when the 200 game is hooked. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the configuration (12) above. In addition, in a configuration that does not use the start of the advantageous section as a trigger for awarding points, the earlier (preferably the first) point awarding opportunity after the start of the advantageous section gives more points than the later or later awarding opportunities. It is preferable to have a configuration in which is easy to be given.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, there is a case where no points are awarded even if the point grant opportunity is established (0 points are selected by the point grant lottery). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one or more points are always given.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the granting probability of granting points and the selection probability of each number of points are changed according to the granting trigger, but at least one of them is changed according to the total points. may be For example, when the total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, points may be awarded more easily than when the total points are less than the predetermined value.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the point suggestion effect and the provision suggestion effect are configured to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65. Alternatively, it may be a role production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for movable production. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory, for example, using sound effects. This also applies to the continuous effect according to the sixth embodiment. Further, the total suggestive effect may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, or may be configured by auditory effect using sound effects.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the point suggesting effect and the grant suggesting effect are configured to be executed only in games in which grant points are awarded, but may be configured to be executed in other games. For example, it may be executed in a game after the game in which the awarded points are awarded, or may be executed over a plurality of games including the game in which the awarded points are awarded.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the accumulated amount of points is indicated by a numerical value or the like by means of a point suggesting effect or a total suggesting effect. Also, in the provision suggestion effect, the amount of points to be provided may be indicated by a numerical value or the like.

(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, CZ mode, AT mode, and addition of the number of games in AT mode were exemplified as specific events that are advantageous to the player, but the specific events are not limited to these. It may be a mode, a bonus game, or the like.

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, the point suggesting effect is configured to suggest that the given points have been granted and the current total points. A configuration may be adopted in which a given point suggestion effect is executed, such as suggesting the size (given amount) of the given given points. In this case, when the total points (accumulated points) are less than or equal to the retained points, execution of the given point suggestion effect is restricted, and when the total points are greater than the retained points, the execution of the given point suggestion effect is allowed. do it.

Further, while suggesting the current total points, a total point suggestion effect may be performed that does not function as a suggestion that points have been awarded. In this case, when the total points (accumulated points) are less than or equal to the holding points, execution of the total point suggesting effect is restricted, and when the total points are greater than the holding points, execution of the total point suggesting effect is permitted. do it. At that time, the trigger for executing the total point suggesting effect is not necessarily the point granting trigger, and the total point suggesting effect may be executed when a trigger other than the point granting trigger is established.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, the execution of the point-suggestion effect is restricted when the total points (accumulated points) are equal to or less than the retained points. The configuration may be such that the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted. That is, it may be configured to permit execution of the point suggesting effect when the total points and the held points are the same value. This is the same in the fourth embodiment, and may be configured to allow execution of the point suggesting effect when the accumulated points are equal to or greater than the corresponding points.

(21) In the above-described first embodiment, when the total points (accumulated points) become larger than the holding points, execution of the point suggesting effect is permitted. ) may be subtracted to allow execution of the point suggesting effect when the total points become larger than the subtracted value. Also, if the retention points are small, the gap between the total points and the initial value is not so large, and it is expected that the period until the total points catch up with the retention points will be short. It is assumed that the gap from the initial value will increase, and the period during which the execution of the point suggestion effect will be restricted will tend to lengthen. Based on this, in situations where the retained points are less than a specific value (for example, 3 points), execution of the point suggesting effect is allowed when the total points are greater than the retained points. A configuration may be adopted in which the execution of the point suggesting effect is permitted when the total points become greater than a subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the retained points (for example, 1 point).

(22) In the above-described first embodiment, when the point suggestion effect is restricted (when the total points (accumulated points) are less than the holding points), the effect is not executed, but the effect is not restricted. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect is less likely to be executed than in the case (the execution probability of the point suggestion effect is lower in the restricted state than in the non-restricted state). In the configuration in which the point suggesting effect is not executed in the restricted state, there is a risk that the player's interest in the points will diminish if the restricted period is prolonged. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence.

(23) In the above-described first embodiment, when the point suggestive effect is restricted, the lottery for execution of whether or not to execute the effect is not performed. After performing, regardless of the result, it may be configured to limit the execution of the point suggestion effect. This is the same in the above-described fourth embodiment, and when the total points (accumulated points) are less than the corresponding points, a lottery for execution of the point suggestion effect is performed, and regardless of the result, the point suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured to restrict execution.

(24) In the above-described first embodiment, the restricted state is released based on the fact that the total points (accumulated points) become greater than the retained points, but the condition for releasing the restricted state is limited to this. not a thing For example, the restricted state may be released based on the number of games played since the execution of the previous point suggestion effect reaches a predetermined number of games.

(25) In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration that does not use (or derive) holding points may be adopted. In other words, the difference between the actual total points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect may be used to execute the later point suggestion effect. For example, when the actual total points are 3 points, and the previous point suggestion effect is executed for 2 points, the points suggested to the player by the previous point suggestion effect are more than the actual total points. Based on the fact that the difference value is small (in other words, the difference value is 1 or more), the later point suggesting effect (the effect corresponding to the total of 3 points) is performed even under the situation where the total points do not change. In this case, the following effects are expected.

In a game using points, in order to strongly motivate the player to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to award points to increase the frequency of the point suggesting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the points. On the other hand, however, if the number of opportunities to award points is increased, the degree of difficulty in reaching the privilege grant value will be lowered, and as a result, the degree of privilege must be kept low, and there is a risk that the appeal to players will decrease. . In other words, there is a concern that an attempt to increase the frequency of the point-suggestion effect will rather impair the attractiveness of the game using the points. In this respect, according to the configuration (25), even if points are not actually given, the point suggesting effect can be performed based on the difference between the total points and the previous point suggesting effect. For this reason, it is possible to expand the opportunities to execute the point suggesting effect without increasing the opportunities for awarding points (in other words, without lowering the difficulty of reaching the privilege award value). As a result, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of notification while maintaining the level of the privilege, and to favorably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game.

In addition, in a configuration that does not derive the retained points, based on the points granted each time, a point suggestion effect is used to suggest the amount to be granted (amount of points to be granted for one time). A configuration may be adopted in which a difference value from the points used in the previous point suggestion effect is derived, and the later point suggestion effect is executed based on the difference value. For example, when 2 points are given and a 1-point effect is performed as the previous point suggestion effect, the actually given points and the previous point suggestion effect are used as the later point suggestion effect. In this case, an effect for one point, which is the difference from the amount used, is executed. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the later point suggesting effect even if no points are given, and it is possible to suitably increase the frequency of the point suggesting effect.

(26) In the second embodiment, when the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 1), the execution control of the point effect is performed without being based on the difference (the affirmative determination is made in step S2604 of FIG. 61). However, the execution control of the point effect based on the difference value and the execution control of the point effect not based on the difference value are used to determine the effect execution lottery. The winning probability may be varied. Specifically, in the former case, the winning probability may be set so that the point suggesting effect is more likely to be executed than in the latter case. By adopting such a configuration, the difference value derived from the previous point suggestive effect is actively utilized, and it is possible to suitably produce the feeling that the total points have increased.

(27) In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of execution of the point suggesting effect for points used that are smaller than the retained points is varied according to the magnitude of the retained points. Specifically, when the retention point is a first value (eg, 4 points), the usage is less than the retention point compared to when the retention point is a second value (eg, 2 points) that is less than the first value. A configuration may be adopted in which the point suggestion effect of the point is easily executed.

By making the previous point suggestion effect correspond to a value smaller than the holding point, in order to secure a margin for the later point suggestion effect, the previous point suggestion effect tends to suggest a total point that is too small. As a result, there is a concern that it will not be possible to effectively arouse the desire to continue playing games. In this regard, in this configuration, the larger the retained points in the first place, the easier it is for the type corresponding to the value smaller than the retained points to be selected, and the difference for the later point suggestion effect is easily secured. It is possible to suitably suppress the fact that the point suggestion effect of the point is poor. Therefore, it is possible to suggest appropriate total points in both the preceding point suggesting effect and the later point suggesting effect, and it is possible to favorably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game.

As in (25) above, the difference between the actual total points or granted points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect is used to execute the later point suggestion effect without deriving the retained points. In such a case, it is preferable to make it easier to execute the point-suggestion effect of the points used that are smaller than the total points, etc. than when the actual total points, etc. are larger.

(28) In the above-described second embodiment, the point suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times based on the difference value derived from the previous point suggestion effect. That is, after executing the first point suggesting effect using part of the difference value, the second point suggesting effect may be executed using the rest of the difference value.

(29) In the above-described third embodiment, when the total points (accumulated points) after the awarded points are given at the time of termination of the first AT mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 3 points), the retained points is not updated, it may be configured so that the held points are not updated when the first AT mode ends, regardless of the total points.

(30) In the above-described third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the held points are not updated regardless of the trigger for awarding points by the main controller 101 . For example, it may be configured to switch whether or not to update the held points according to the number of games played in the advantageous section or the number of remaining games. If there is a high possibility that the bonus value cannot be reached, such as when the number of games until the end of the advantageous section (initialization of the total points) is small, by shifting to a state that restricts the update of the retained points, initialization Excessive widening of the gap between the initial total points and the retained points can be suppressed.

(31) In the above-described third embodiment, when the difference between the current retained points and the initial value of the total points when initialized is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the update of the retained points is restricted. may be According to this configuration, the gap between the retained points and the initial value of the total points can be suppressed to a predetermined value or less, and it is possible to suppress the lengthening of the limit period of the point suggestion effect.

(32) In the above-described third embodiment, the lottery for execution of the point suggestion effect is performed (the point suggestion effect can be executed) when the retained points are not updated. A configuration may be adopted in which the execution lottery for the performance is not performed, or even if it is performed, it is forcibly not performed (point suggesting performance is not performed).

Further, when the retained points are not updated, the type lottery of the point suggestion performance may not be executed, and the point suggestion performance of the same type as the previous point suggestion performance may be executed. That is, the type of the point suggesting effect in the case where the held points are not updated may be determined based on the type of the previous point suggesting effect.

(33) In the above-described fifth embodiment, given points and sub-points are added to derive points that can be produced. It is not limited. For example, a coefficient greater than 1 may be derived as a predetermined value separately from the given points, and the given points may be multiplied by this coefficient to derive the effectable points. In the case of deriving the directable points from the added value of the granted points and the sub-points, even if the granted points are not granted, it is possible to secure at least the numerical value of the sub-points as the directable points. In this sense, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the fifth embodiment because it is possible to execute the effect.

(34) In the fifth embodiment, a configuration for performing execution control of the provision suggestion effect in units of points provided each time (configuration for executing the provision suggestion effect based on the number of points provided each time); After that, sub-points may be added to the given points each time to derive the points that can be produced, and based on the derived points that can be produced, the giving suggesting production may be executed. In this case, it is possible to perform the giving suggestion effect even when the given points are not given, and it is possible to perform the giving suggestion effect by suggesting points larger than the actual given amount, etc. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's expectation for the arrival of the .

(35) In the fifth embodiment, sub-points are given at the start of the advantageous section, but sub-points may be given when the production possible points are equal to or less than a predetermined value. good. According to this configuration, in a situation in which the given points are given at the time of giving at the start of the advantageous section, the given points are used as the points that can be produced, and the giving suggestion performance is executed, and then the giving suggestion performance is executed to produce the points that can be given. can be configured to compensate for the shortage with sub-points.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which gives a sub point in the middle of an advantageous area. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which sub-points are given when a predetermined trigger is established after the start of the advantageous section. For example, in order to ensure a certain degree of difficulty in reaching the reward award value, in a configuration in which the trigger for awarding points is suppressed to some extent, it is difficult to award points in the middle or end of the advantageous section, There is a concern that it will be difficult to keep the player's interest in the points as a result of making it difficult to perform the giving suggestion effect. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the frequency of the giving suggestion effects in the middle and end stages of the advantageous section can be increased, and the player's interest in the points can be preferably maintained. As the above-mentioned predetermined trigger, in addition to the fact that the points that can be produced become equal to or less than a predetermined value, the timing of the start of an advantageous section or the number of games from the previous giving suggestion effect reaches a predetermined number of games. .

When sub-points are given in the middle of an advantageous section, the total points may be derived by giving the sub-points to the cumulative added value of the points given so far, that is, the total points.

(36) In the above-described fifth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the point awarding opportunity is not established at the start of the advantageous section, and sub-points are awarded in accordance with the first awarding opportunity in the advantageous section. In this case as well, it is possible to increase the frequency of giving suggestion effects from the beginning of the advantageous section, as in the case where sub-points are given at the point giving opportunity at the start of the advantageous section.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, a large sub-point (eg, 20 points) given at the start of an advantageous section is more likely to lead to a larger sub-point than a smaller one (eg, 10 points). However, a configuration may be adopted in which larger sub-points are more likely to be derived when the number of assigned points is smaller than when the number of assigned points is large. According to such a configuration, when the granted points are sufficient, the sub-points are reduced to reduce the difference from the actual total points, while the granted points are small and the grant suggestion production is performed. can not be executed or sufficient execution frequency cannot be ensured, the sub-points can be increased to compensate for the shortage, and when the given points are small, the configuration is suitable for increasing the execution frequency of the given suggestion effect. can do.

(38) In the fifth embodiment, sub-points are awarded only once in the advantageous section, but sub-points may be awarded a plurality of times. In this case, the sub-points may be awarded in accordance with the opportunity for awarding points, or may be awarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a game that is not the opportunity for awarding points. In addition, as a predetermined condition, if the given point is not given at the time of giving, or if the value of the given point is less than a predetermined value, the start timing of the advantageous section or the number of games from the previous giving suggestion effect When a predetermined number of games is reached, when a predetermined combination is won, when a point grant lottery that triggers the predetermined combination is won, and when a specific combination of symbols such as a chance eye is stopped on the reels 32L to 32R, etc. can be considered. .

(39) In the above-described fifth embodiment, a grant lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant sub-points when sub-points are granted, and sub-points are granted if the lottery wins. Alternatively, sub-points may always be given at the time of giving sub-points.

(40) In the fifth embodiment, the display control device 81 is configured to derive the sub-points. may be In this case, the process of adding the predetermined numerical information to the assigned points may be performed by the display control device 81 or may be performed by the main control device 101 .

(41) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the sub-points may not be derived, and the assigned points may be used as they are as production possible points. That is, it may be configured such that the effectable point is subtracted from the effectable point derived from the imparted point by the effectable point of the executed imparting suggestion effect, and the effectable point is updated, and the subsequent imparting suggestive effect is executed based on the update result. . In this case, the total points (total value of the awarded points) may be directly used as the total points without giving sub-points to the total points.

(42) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the execution probability of the giving suggestion effect is different depending on the type of the point granting opportunity. good. Specifically, when the directable point is a first value (for example, 20 points), the giving suggestion effect is executed more than when it is a second value (for example, 10 points) smaller than the first value. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy. In this case, it is possible to reduce the effectable points that remain without being used for execution of the giving suggestion effect, and it is possible to use the effectable points efficiently.

(43) In the fifth embodiment, the total points may be derived without giving sub-points. That is, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the giving suggestive effect is executed based on the effectable points to which the sub points are added, while the total suggestive effect is executed based on the actual total points. When sub-points are used, different numerical values from the actual given points are added to select the mode of giving suggestion production and total suggestion production, so there is a deviation from the actual total points in the points suggested by those productions. likely to occur. While the player can only indirectly predict the total points through the grant amount of each round, the total suggestive effect directly suggests the total points, so the player can continue playing. It is likely to be an index when determining whether or not to play, and it is assumed that the difference from the actual total points will have a large impact on the game. In this regard, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to perform a total suggestive effect in line with the actual total points, while increasing the frequency of the effectable effect by adding sub-points to the effectable effect that can be given. .

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed based on the directable points to which no sub-points are given, while the total suggestive effect is executed by adding sub-points to the actual total points. It may be configured to execute based on the total points.

(44) In the fifth embodiment, the additional suggestive effect and the total suggestive effect are executed by different notification means (the auxiliary display section 65 for the former and the upper lamp 63 for the latter). It may be configured to be executed by the same notification means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65).

(45) In the fifth embodiment, when executing the preceding effect suggesting effect, the effected points of the effect are subtracted from the effectable points. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(46) In the above-described fifth embodiment, a unique effected point is set for each type of suggested effect to be added, but a uniform effected point may be set regardless of the type.

(47) In the fifth embodiment, the predetermined value (step S4804 in FIG. 5 points), the predetermined value may be a value larger than the minimum required value.

(48) In the fifth embodiment, the number of total points corresponds to a plurality of types of total suggestive effects. It is good also as a structure corresponding to. This also applies to the above eighth embodiment in which the total points are derived based on the cumulative added value of the effected points.

(49) In the sixth embodiment described above, the suggesting effect is executed in the final game of the continuous effect, but the suggesting effect may be executed after the continuous effect is finished. In this case, in order to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship with the continuous effect, it is preferable to execute the additional suggestive effect in the next game after the continuous effect is finished. At that time, when the next game is started or started, such as when the start lever 41 is operated in the next game or when the reels 32L to 32R start rotating, the giving suggestion performance may be performed. However, for example, it may be performed at a predetermined timing in the middle of the next game, such as when the first stop operation is performed, or when the next game is finished, such as when the final stop operation is performed. In some cases, a suggestion effect may be given.

(50) In the sixth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the additional suggesting effect is executed in accordance with the execution of the continuous handout that is performed over a plurality of games. It is good also as a structure which performs an addition suggestion production|presentation according to execution. At this time, in order to increase the player's attention to the additional suggesting effect, the above-mentioned specific effect may be an effect to inform the player of whether or not a specific event (CZ mode, AT mode, etc.) advantageous to the player is won.

In addition, not limited to the continuous effect, for example, the display control device 81 counts the previous giving suggestion effect, the previous giving opportunity, the start timing of the advantageous section, the number of games since the power is turned on, and the number of games reaches a predetermined number. A configuration may be adopted in which the addition suggestion effect is executed based on the execution of a predetermined process in the display control device 81, such as the execution of the provision suggestion effect when it reaches.

(51) In the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the suggested effect is given along with the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen. good too.

(52) In the sixth embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the provision suggestion effect not based on the provision opportunity is executed according to the difference number of coins. For example, if the provision suggestion effect is executed when the number of difference is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is possible to perform the provision suggestion effect in a situation where the medals are likely to run out, and the player quits the game. It is possible to arouse the desire to continue playing the game in a difficult situation.

Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the giving suggestion effect not based on the giving opportunity is executed according to the actual total points or the total points. Specifically, when the actual total points or total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the aforementioned giving suggestion effect is executed, or when the actual total points or total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or are less than a predetermined value. A configuration may be adopted in which the above-described addition suggestion effect is more likely to be executed. According to such a configuration, when the total points approach the privilege grant value, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect can be increased, and it is possible to favorably encourage the continuation of the game.

(53) In the above seventh embodiment, the transition to the high-probability mode is made based on the number of games played, or a drawing for transition to the high-probability mode is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition lottery is performed based on the fact that it becomes. In this case, it is conceivable that the specific value is a numerical value that allows execution of the additional suggesting effect for a plurality of times. According to this configuration, it is possible to continue the high-probability mode over the period in which the additional suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, and to enhance the effect of the mode.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which shifts to a high probability mode, or performs a lottery for the shift based on a total point or a total point becoming more than a predetermined value. At that time, if the predetermined value is set to a value close to the privilege grant value, the possibility of reaching the privilege grant value in the high probability mode increases, so that the player associates the high probability mode with reaching the privilege grant value. It becomes easier, and it becomes possible to further enhance the appeal of the mode. Also, the predetermined value may be used as the privilege provision value. In this case, in order to shift to the high probability mode in a state in which the privilege grant value is actually reached, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect is increased to arouse the player's expectation, and then the arrival of the privilege grant value is notified. it becomes possible to

(54) In the seventh embodiment, the high-probability mode transition lottery is performed in the game in which the point award opportunity is established. It is good also as a structure to carry out.

(55) In the seventh embodiment, the high-probability mode transition lottery is executed at the start of the game, but during the game (for example, when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed) or when the game ends (when the final stop operation is performed).

(56) In the above-described seventh embodiment, there are two modes, the normal mode and the high-probability mode. A configuration having three or more types of states, such as having a first high-probability mode and a second high-probability mode in which the execution probability of the additional suggestion effect is further increased, may be employed.

(57) In the above eighth embodiment, when the total points are greater than or equal to the privilege grant value in executing the total suggestive performance, it is configured to switch to the total suggestive performance according to the total points. It may be configured to switch to a total suggestive effect according to the total points when it is equal to or greater than a small predetermined value.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the first total points based on the cumulative added value of the effected points and the second total points similar to the total points according to the fifth embodiment are derived, and the total A configuration may be adopted in which the total suggestive effect corresponding to the second total points is executed when the points are equal to or greater than the privilege grant value or equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

(58) In the above-described eighth embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the total suggestive effect according to the number of executions of the additional suggestive effect. Specifically, when the number of executions of the given suggestion production is a predetermined number or more, the total suggestion production is executed, or when the number of executions of the provision suggestion production is a prescribed number of times, than when it is a smaller number than that. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the total suggestive effect is easily executed. In this case, the total suggestive effect is more aggressively executed as the achievement of the grant suggestive effect increases and the total point becomes larger, so that the expectation of the player who expects to reach the privilege grant value can be suitably aroused. be possible.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to a predetermined fixed value. The advantageous section may be terminated by the upper limit number of games. In addition, the upper limit increase number is not limited to one predetermined fixed value, but a plurality of upper limit numbers of games are provided, and the upper limit increase number is selected from among them by lottery or set value, etc. may end.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, there are two types of sections, the normal section and the advantageous section. A configuration having three or more types of states, such as having one advantageous section and a second advantageous section in which the easiness of shifting to the first AT mode or the like is treated more favorably than the first advantageous section, may be employed.

(61) The probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery are not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiments.

In addition, although it is configured to shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous section in the game next to the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won. A predetermined number of games may exist between the game in which the game is won and the game in which the game is shifted to the advantageous interval.

Further, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started in the game that shifts to the advantageous section, but the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started in the game following the game that shifts to the advantageous section. The display may be started, or a predetermined number of games may exist between the game in which the transition to the advantageous section is started and the game in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases is exemplified as a bonus game. low medal increase rate). Note that the slightly increasing bonus game may be one in which the expected net increase in number per game is less than 0.5. Moreover, instead of a slight increase, medals may be increased normally (which is advantageous for the player).

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is ensured by adopting a configuration in which the AT mode shift winning is less likely to occur in the normal section than in the advantageous section.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the game of the 3-bet game performed in a state in which the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is explained as a normal game, but the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. A 2-bet game played in this state may be the normal game, or a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game played without carrying over the 1st BB or the 2nd BB may be the normal game. A 2-bet game played with the 2nd BB carried over may be the normal game, and a 3-bet game played with the 1st BB carried over may be the normal game. Further, the game may be progressed while switching between these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, switching from any of the games performed in the 2-bet game to any of the games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example, , switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above-described games performed in the 2-bet game may be the normal game.

(65) In each of the above embodiments, the ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. It is sufficient that the increase/decrease rate and the increase/decrease mode of the paid balls (game media) are changed depending on the number. For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(66) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(67) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state where the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball entry rate to the ball entry portion is high and low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 are defined as the high ball entry state. Each invention may be applied. In addition, in pachinko machines, the period during which 3-bet games are played in the waiting period of Omen mode, CZ mode, etc. (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is updated) is the first special game (first special 2 bet game and 2 BB state bonus during the waiting period. The period during which the game is played (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is not updated) may be applied to the other of the period during which the first special symbol is played and the period during which the second special symbol is played.

(68) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine is of a type in which when medals as game media are inserted, the game can be started by setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707).” Regarding the background art, “Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, etc., it is necessary to improve the interest of the game. There is still room for improvement.” This was accomplished with the problem to be solved by the invention.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising a second control means (display control device 81) for performing control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means is
Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value (privilege imparting value) corresponding to the awarding of the privilege, the player is given a predetermined privilege (to the second AT mode). transition) can be granted (a function of executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Initializing means for initializing the total value of the benefit numerical values when a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous section) is established (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). )When,
with
The second control means is
Specific notification execution means (display control device 81 for points by display control device 81) is controlled so that specific notification (point suggesting effect) is executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as notification corresponding to the total value of numerical values for benefits. function to execute processing and point effect execution processing);
storage means (various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 of the display control device 81) for storing specific information (holding points or holding rank information) corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical values or the mode of the executed specific notification;
with
The specific notification executing means is configured to refer to the specific information in the storage means and control the execution of the specific notification,
The second control means is configured to be able to hold the specific information in the storage means without initializing when the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized by the initialization means of the first control means. A game machine characterized by

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. By performing notification corresponding to the total value each time, the player can recognize that the total value increases toward the given corresponding value, and motivation to further increase the numerical value for the privilege is aroused. be. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege numerical values accumulated up to that point is lost. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is directly reflected in the notification, there is a concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she will be forced to re-store the money, which will reduce the desire to continue playing the game. In this regard, in this configuration, in the second control means responsible for controlling the game effect, even if the total value is initialized on the first control means side, the specific information stored in the storage means (total value and execution notification) (information corresponding to ), and is configured to refer to the held specific information when executing control of the specific notification. In this configuration, when the specific notification is performed after the total value is initialized, the execution control can be performed while considering the total value before initialization, etc., and it is possible to suppress the initialization of the total value from being reflected in the notification as it is. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player the impression of re-saving, and to prevent a decrease in motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this feature, the ``initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature A2. The specific notification execution means performs the specific notification based on the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (holding points or holding rank information) held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that execution control of is performed.

In this configuration, since the execution control of the specific notification is performed in consideration of both the total value before initialization and the total value after initialization, after the total value is initialized, the total value before initialization It is possible to perform a specific notification reflecting not only the situation of , but also the situation of the total value after initialization.

Feature A3. The specific notification executing means refers to the specific information held in the storage means and restricts the execution of the specific notification (the function of executing the processing of steps S2604 and S3802 by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since execution of specific notification is restricted by referring to the specific information held in the storage means, execution/non-execution of specific notification can be switched based on the previous total value indicated by the held specific information. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the specific notification of notifying the total value smaller than the total value before the initialization, and it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression of re-accumulating.

Feature A4. Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification based on the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (holding points or holding rank information) held in the storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 and S3802 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted based on the total value after initialization and the specific information held in the storage means. , it is possible to determine the size of the total value at that time based on the previous total value indicated by the held specific information, and to cancel the execution of the specific notification when it is smaller. In other words, since the execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than the total value before initialization is suppressed, even if the total value actually decreases due to the influence of initialization, the total value from the player's point of view The specific notification can be made as if the value is gradually increasing, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue the game after the total value is initialized.

Feature A5. The limiting means limits execution of the specific notification when the total value after initialization by the initializing means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information held in the storage means or smaller than the value of the specific information. The game machine according to feature A4, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted for a period in which the total value after initialization is equal to or less than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, or is smaller than the total value before initialization. Execution of specific notification for notifying a total value smaller than the total value is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effect of initialization, the specific notification can be made as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value can be initialized. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game later.

Feature A6. wherein the specific notification executing means is configured to not execute the specific notification or to make the specific notification less likely to be executed when in a restricted state by the restricting means, compared to when not in the restricted state; The gaming machine according to feature A4 or feature A5.

In the above configuration, by restricting the execution of the specific notification, it is possible to disable the notification or reduce the frequency of execution, so that the above effects in the configuration of the feature A4 or feature A5 can be preferably exhibited. be possible.

Feature A7. The total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization (corresponding points corresponding to the rank information of the selected type) is stored in the storage means If the value is greater than the value of the retained specific information (retained points or retained rank information), the total value after initialization or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization is updated as the new specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized by comprising updating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605 and S3702 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the total value after initialization is greater than the value of the held specific information, the total value or the like is held as new specific information, so the total obtained by the game up to that point is Execution control of the specific notification can be performed based on the maximum value among the values. As a result, execution of the specific notification corresponding to the total value smaller than the maximum value is suppressed, and as a result, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification when the total value that updates the maximum value up to that point is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the total value continues to increase, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue playing the game.

Feature A8. The specific notification executing means includes mode determination means (function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification based on the specific information held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by:

With the above configuration, specific notification corresponding to the total value or the like indicated by the specific information held in the storage means can be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification of notifying the total value smaller than the total value before initialization, and to prevent the player from giving the impression of re-saving.

Feature A9. The specific notification execution means is
A first means (step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification that allows the player to recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the value corresponding to the specific information held in the storage means as the specific notification. function to execute the processing of
After the specific notification is executed by the first means, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the value (accumulated points) corresponding to the specific information (difference value between points used and accumulated points) a second means capable of executing the specific notification based at least in part (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the second means utilizes the difference between the value corresponding to the specific notification executed by the first means and the retained specific information, that is, the margin of the retained information for the executed specific notification Specific notification is executed. If the execution frequency of the specific notification becomes low, the opportunity for the player to be conscious of the existence of the privilege numerical value decreases, so there is a concern that interest in the privilege numerical value will gradually fade away. can be increased, and the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature, "the first means capable of executing the notification corresponding to the value smaller than the total value as the specific notification (the function of executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81)" It can also be expressed as "first means (function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification that the player can recognize a numerical value smaller than the total value as the specific notification". can.

Feature A10. After the execution of the specific notification by the first means, the specific notification executing means, in a situation where the total value has not increased or in a situation where the increase in the total value is a predetermined value (difference from the holding point) or less, The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the specific notification by the second means can be executed.

In the above configuration, when the privilege numerical value is not assigned or when the assigned privilege numerical value is small, the specific notification is performed by the second means, so the execution frequency of the specific notification can be favorably increased. become.

Feature A11. The specific notification execution means is
If the total value after initialization by the initialization means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information held in the storage means or is smaller than the value of the specific information, the limiting means (display control) for limiting execution of the specific notification a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 and S3802 by the device 81),
The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, wherein the specific notification by the second means can be executed in a restricted state by the restricting means.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the total value after initialization is less than or smaller than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, execution of the specific notification is restricted. Execution of specific notification for notifying a total value smaller than the value is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effect of initialization, the specific notification can be made as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value can be initialized. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game later.

On the other hand, however, if the execution frequency of the specific notification decreases, the chances for the player to become aware of the existence of the privilege numerical value decrease, so there is a concern that the player's interest in the privilege numerical value will gradually decline. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state, but in that case, if the specific notification is performed in correspondence with the actual total value (total value decreased due to initialization), the total value will disappear. There is a possibility that the original significance of restricting the execution of the notification may be lost. Conversely, if the specific information is made to correspond to the held specific information (total value before initialization), the information will be induced in a manner that deviates from the actual total value, and the player's confidence in the information could lead to a decline in

In this regard, in this configuration, in the limited state, the specific notification is performed by the second means that utilizes the margin of the retained information for the specific notification that has already been executed. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably deal with the inconvenience caused by the establishment of the restricted state.

Feature A12. The second control means is means for holding the difference without initializing it even if the total value is initialized in the first control means by the initialization means (holding the difference value by the display control device 81). function).

In the above configuration, when the total value is initialized on the first control means side, the difference does not disappear and is maintained thereafter. be possible. As a result, the specific notification can be executed by utilizing the difference generated by the specific notification before the initialization after the initialization. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature A13. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
The initialization means performs the initialization when or when the specific state ends,
The specific notification executing means performs the specific notification by the second means based on at least part of the difference derived in the specific state before initialization in the specific state after initialization by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A12, characterized in that it is made executable.

In the above configuration, since the margin generated by the specific notification in the previous specific state can be utilized to execute the specific notification in the later specific state, in the configuration in which the total value is initialized when the specific state ends It is possible to suitably increase the execution frequency of

Feature A14. If the total value after initialization by the initialization means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information held in the storage means or is smaller than the specific information, the limit means (display control device 81 a function to execute the processing of steps S2604 and S3802 by
Updating means for updating the specific information held in the storage means when a predetermined update condition (that the accumulated points are greater than the held points) is established (function for executing the processing of step S2605 by the display control device 81) When,
Restricting updating of the specific information by the updating means in a predetermined case (at the end of the first AT mode and when the accumulated points are 3 or more) even when the predetermined update condition is satisfied. update restriction means (function for executing the processing of step S3602 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the total value after initialization is less than or smaller than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, so that the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so the total value before initialization Execution of specific notification that notifies a total value smaller than is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effect of initialization, the specific notification can be made as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value can be initialized. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game later.

On the other hand, however, when the value of the retained specific information (the retained value) increases, the gap between the total value and the initial value when the total value is initialized increases. As a result, the period until the actual total value catches up with the held value becomes longer, and the execution frequency of the specific notification tends to greatly decrease. In this case, the chances for the player to be conscious of the existence of the bonus numbers are reduced, so interest in the bonus numbers gradually fades away, and there is a concern that the contribution to the continuation of the game will be difficult to achieve. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update condition is satisfied, the update of the held value is restricted depending on the situation, so that the gap between the initial value and the initial value at the time of initialization is suppressed from expanding. . As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification is greatly reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the bonus numerical value.

Feature A15. The update condition includes the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means or the value corresponding to the specific notification mode after initialization (corresponding points corresponding to the rank information of the selected type ) is greater than the value of the specific information (holding points or holding rank information) held in the storage means.

In the above configuration, when the total value after initialization is greater than the value of the held specific information, the total value or the like is held as new specific information, so the total obtained by the game up to that point is The highest value among the values, etc., can be taken as the hold value. As a result, execution of the specific notification corresponding to the total value smaller than the maximum value can be suppressed, and as a result, the specific notification is executed only when the total value for updating the maximum value up to that point is obtained. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the total value continues to increase, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue playing the game.

On the other hand, however, if the maximum value of each time is always reflected as the held value, the gap between the total value and the initial value when the total value is initialized tends to increase, and the above-described inconvenience described in feature A14 tends to occur. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the total value exceeds the maximum value so far, the retained value is not updated depending on the situation, so the gap between the initial value and the initial value when initialized will be excessive. can be suppressed. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification is greatly reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the bonus numerical value.

Feature A16. A plurality of granting opportunities are provided as a trigger for granting the privilege numerical value by the numerical value granting means,
The update restricting means grants the privilege numerical value at a predetermined grant opportunity (execution trigger for the grant lottery based on the end of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery) among a plurality of grant occasions. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or feature A15, wherein, in the event that the specified information is updated, the updating of the specific information by the updating means is restricted.

In the above configuration, update of the held value is restricted depending on which one of the plurality of granting motives for granting the privilege numerical value is given. As a result, for example, in the case where the bonus value is given at the moment just before the initialization, the bonus value can be prevented from being reflected in the retained value. It is possible to suppress an excessive gap from the initial value when it is set.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the predetermined giving opportunity is the last opportunity before initialization by the initialization means.

After the bonus value is granted by the last grant opportunity before initialization, no new benefit value will be granted until initialization, so reaching the grant corresponding value before initialization is achieved. no. Then, the privilege numerical value at the final opportunity is assumed to be absent due to the subsequent initialization, and ultimately does not contribute to reaching the grant corresponding value. Based on such characteristics, in this configuration, if the granting trigger for which the privilege numerical value is granted is the final trigger before initialization, it is configured so that the granted privilege numerical value is not reflected in the retained value. , it is possible to prevent the gap from the initial value from expanding unnecessarily. As described above, the bonus value at the final opportunity does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the bonus. It can be said that there is no problem in aiming to reach the value. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without interfering with the game of the player.

Feature A18. When the numerical value for privilege is granted by the predetermined granting opportunity and the total value reflecting the numerical value for privilege granted is smaller than the corresponding value for granting, updating the specific information by the updating means The gaming machine according to feature A16 or feature A17, characterized by limiting.

For example, if the stored value is not updated when the total value reaches the given value corresponding to the given benefit value, there is a concern that it will not be possible to appropriately notify that the given value has reached the given value. In this regard, in this configuration, instead of always restricting the update of the retention value when it is a grant opportunity that is subject to the restriction of retention value update, the total value that reflects the value for benefits granted at that opportunity is granted It is configured to restrict only when the corresponding value has not been reached. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the notification corresponding to reaching the given corresponding value cannot be performed.

Feature A19. The update restriction means, when the privilege numerical value is granted by the predetermined granting opportunity and the total value reflecting the granted privilege numerical value is a predetermined value (3) or more, the updating means The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A18, characterized in that updating of the specific information by is restricted.

If the configuration is such that the retained value is not updated at all times in the case of the granting trigger that is subject to the restriction of updating the retained value, the increase in the total value will not be notified to the player at that trigger. It may give the impression that there is no possibility that the usage value will be given (in other words, the total value will not increase on that occasion). In this regard, in this configuration, the restriction is limited to the case where the total value reflecting the bonus numerical value given at that opportunity is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, when the total value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value and the gap between the initial value and the initial value at the time of initialization is expected to increase, the total value is prevented from being reflected in the retained value. is less than a predetermined value, the held value can be updated and a notification that the total value has increased can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to notify that the total value has increased while preventing the gap from the initial value at the time of initialization from becoming excessive.

Feature A20. When the updating of the specific information is restricted by the update restricting means, the specific notification execution means performs the specific notification based on the specific information held in a non-updated state instead of the total value at that time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A19, further comprising mode determining means for determining (a function of executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81).

For example, when updating is not performed due to update restrictions, if the mode of specific notification is determined based on the total value (the total value in which the given privilege value is reflected), the mode of specific notification and the retained value becomes inconsistent, which may cause player confusion. In this respect, in the present configuration, since the mode of specific notification is determined based on the retained value in a state where the update is postponed (the retained value before the bonus value is given), the mode of specific notification and the retained value can be properly matched.

Feature A21. The second control means is a second initialization means for initializing the specific information held in the storage means (step S2702 by the display control device 81, A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A20, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3901.

In the above configuration, since the specific information held in the storage means is initialized when the privilege is granted, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player the impression of re-accumulating with the period until the privilege being granted as a delimiter. becomes possible.

Feature A22. As the game state, at least a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event that is advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
The first control means is
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein the initialization means initializes the total value when or when the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. By applying any one of the features A1 to A21 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature A23. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features A1 to A22 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A23, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Initializing means for initializing the total value of the benefit numerical values when a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous section) is established (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). )When,
Specific notification execution means (display control device 81 executes processing for executing point effect by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (point suggestion effect) as notification related to numerical value for privilege to be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
When a predetermined restriction condition (accumulated points does not reach the retained points) is satisfied, even if the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the specific notification by the specific notification executing means is performed. Limiting means capable of limiting execution (function for executing the process of step S2604 by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. By performing notification corresponding to the total value of each time and the given bonus value, the player can recognize that the total value increases toward the given value, and the bonus value is further increased. The desire to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege numerical values accumulated up to that point is lost. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notice corresponding to the total value is given as a notice related to the bonus numerical value, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notice as it is, the player will have the impression of being forced to re-accumulate. There is a concern that it will be given and the desire to continue playing will be reduced. In addition, in the configuration of performing notification corresponding to the granted numerical value for privilege, as a result of the divergence between the total value predicted by the player from the notified granted value and the actual total value, the player's response to the notification Confidence may decline. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the numerical value for the privilege is given, the execution of the specific notification is restricted due to the establishment of the restriction condition, so the specific notification that reflects the initialized total value is performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the notification of an assigned value that does not match the actual total value, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

In addition, in this feature, "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value or notification corresponding to the provision of the privilege numerical value". In addition, in this feature, the ``initializing means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main controller 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature B2. The specific notification execution means is
Execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the specific notification based on the award of the privilege numerical value by the numerical value imparting means (function for executing the processing of step S2606 by the display control device 81);
When it is determined to be executed by the execution determination means, execution means for executing the specific notification (the process of step S2608 by the display control device 81, the function of executing the point effect execution process);
with
In the case of the restricted state by the limiting means, even if the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the judgment processing of the judgment means for execution is performed regardless of the judgment result of the judgment means for execution. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the execution of the specific notification is restricted without being interrupted.

In the above configuration, when the privilege numerical value is given, the specific notification is executed through the execution determination of whether or not to execute the specific notification. Execution of specific notification is restricted regardless of the result of determination or without determination for execution. That is, since the execution of the specific notification is forcibly prohibited, it is preferable that the specific notification that reflects the initialized total value is performed, or that the given value that does not match the actual total value is notified. can be suppressed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the limiting condition includes that the total value is initialized by the initialization means.

In the above configuration, a restricted state that restricts execution of specific notification can be started when the total value is initialized. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific notification reflecting the initialized total value from being performed.

Feature B4. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, the total value before the initialization is used as a holding value (holding point) and can be held even after the initialization (holding point by the display control device 81 function to hold
The limited state by the limiting means is such that the total value after initialization is equal to or greater than the held value held by the holding means or a value corresponding thereto (subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the holding point), or any value thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it can be released when it becomes larger.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is canceled when the total value after initialization becomes equal to or greater than the retained value or the value corresponding thereto. In other words, the execution of the specific notification is restricted until the total value catches up with the held value, and the restriction is lifted after catching up. In this case, in a configuration in which notification corresponding to the total value is given, even if the total value actually decreases due to the influence of the initialization, the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view. Specific notification can be performed as follows. In addition, in the configuration in which notification corresponding to the given bonus value is performed, the total value predicted by the player from the notified given value can be matched with the actual total value. As a result, even after the total value has been initialized, it is possible to favorably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game.

Feature B5. wherein the specific notification executing means is configured to not execute the specific notification when in a restricted state by the limiting means, or to make the specific notification less likely to be performed than in a case where the restriction is not applied. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features B1 to B4.

In the above configuration, by restricting the execution of the specific notification, it is possible to disable the notification or reduce the frequency of execution, so that the above effects in the configuration of the features B1 to B4 can be preferably exhibited. become.

Feature B6. The specific notification execution means is
A first means capable of executing a notification that the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value or the given privilege numerical value as the specific notification (processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
After the specific notification is executed by the first means, at least the difference (difference value between points used and accumulated points) between the specific notification by the first means and the total value (retained points) of the numerical value for benefits A second means capable of executing the specific notification based on a part (the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the specific notification by the second means can be executed in a state of being restricted by the restricting means.

By restricting the execution of the specific notification, the effects of the features B1 to B5 can be obtained. On the other hand, however, if the execution frequency of the specific notification becomes lower due to execution restrictions, the chances for the player to become aware of the existence of the privilege numerical value are reduced, so there is a concern that the player's interest in the privilege numerical value will gradually decline. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state. There is a possibility that the original significance of restricting the execution of the notification may be lost.

In this regard, in this configuration, the second means performs the specific notification based on the difference between the actual value of the specific notification by the first means and the total value, and the specific notification is performed under the restricted state. Since the specific notification by the second means utilizes the margin of the total value for the specific notification that has been executed, by executing such notification in a restricted state, the specific notification mode can be changed from the actual total value. The execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased while matching. Therefore, it is possible to suitably deal with the inconvenience caused by the establishment of the restricted state.

Feature B7. When the total value of the numerical values for benefits is initialized by the initialization means, means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (function for holding the difference value by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that

In the above configuration, even if the total value is initialized, the difference does not disappear and is maintained thereafter. Therefore, when restricting execution of specific notification, the difference can be used across initialization. As a result, the specific notification can be executed by utilizing the difference generated by the specific notification before the initialization after the initialization. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature B8. The limiting condition includes that the total value is less than or equal to a predetermined reference value (holding point),
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized by comprising change means (a function of executing the processing of step S2605 by the display control device 81) capable of changing the reference value according to the game situation. machine.

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the total value is less than or less than a predetermined reference value, and the reference value is changed according to the game situation. You can switch on or off depending on the situation. As a result, for example, when a total value larger than the total value obtained so far is obtained, by changing the reference value accordingly, it is possible to suppress the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the maximum value. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the changing means can change the reference value according to the total value.

According to this configuration, it is possible to change the reference value by following the change in the total value each time. can be changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the maximum value, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B10. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, the total value before the initialization or a value corresponding thereto (subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the holding point) is used as the reference value after the initialization. Equipped with a holding means (function for holding a holding point by the display control device 81) that can hold
As the changing means, when the total value after initialization becomes larger than the reference value, updating means for updating the total value as a new reference value (function for executing the processing of step S2605 by the display control device 81 ), the gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9.

With the above configuration, when the total value after initialization becomes greater than the retained reference value, the total value is retained as a new reference value. The highest value among them is the reference value. Therefore, each time the maximum value is updated, the reference value can be changed, and it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed when the total value is lower than the maximum value each time. On the other hand, when a total value exceeding the maximum value of each time is obtained, execution of the specific notification is not restricted, so that it is possible to inform the player that such a total value has been reached. In other words, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to continue the game by informing the player that the total value has increased, while preventing the player from having the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B11. A change limiting means capable of limiting the change of the reference value by the changing means in a predetermined case (when the first AT mode ends and when the accumulated points are 3 or more) (the display control device 81 executes the process of step S3602). The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, characterized by comprising a function of

For example, when the reference value is changed so that the execution of the specific notification is more likely to be restricted, the frequency of execution of the specific notification can be reduced, and the impression given to the player that the total value has disappeared can be suppressed. On the other hand, there is a risk that the player's interest in the bonus numerical value will fade due to the decrease in notification frequency. In this regard, in this configuration, since the change of the reference value can be restricted, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the notification frequency and to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature B12. A plurality of granting opportunities are provided as a trigger for granting the privilege numerical value by the numerical value granting means,
The change restriction means grants the privilege numerical value at a predetermined granting opportunity (a granting lottery execution opportunity based on the end of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery) among a plurality of granting occasions. The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the change of the reference value can be restricted in the event of a change in the reference value.

For example, when a total value larger than the total value obtained so far is obtained, by changing the reference value according to the obtained total value, the specific notification can be executed according to the change in the total value each time. be able to limit. However, on the other hand, it also leads to widening the gap from the initial value when it is initialized, which greatly reduces the frequency of subsequent notification. In this regard, in this configuration, the change of the reference value is restricted depending on which one of the plurality of granting motives for granting the privilege numerical value is given. As a result, for example, in the case where the bonus value is given at a timing just before initialization, the given bonus value can be prevented from being reflected in the reference value. It is possible to suppress an excessive gap from the initial value of time.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the predetermined giving opportunity is a final opportunity before initialization by the initialization means.

After the bonus value is granted by the final grant opportunity before initialization, no new benefit value will be granted until initialization, so the grant corresponding value will be reached before initialization. no. Therefore, the value for the privilege at the final opportunity is assumed to be absent due to the subsequent initialization, and ultimately does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the grant. Based on such characteristics, in this configuration, if the granting trigger for which the privilege numerical value is granted is the final trigger before initialization, it is configured so that the granted privilege numerical value is not reflected in the reference value. , it is possible to prevent the gap from the initial value from expanding unnecessarily. As described above, the bonus value at the final opportunity does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the bonus. It is not a problem in aiming to reach the value. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without hindering the player's game.

Feature B14. The present invention is characterized by comprising initialization means for initializing the reference value (function for executing the processing of steps S2702 and S3901 by the display control device 81) when the predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B13.

In the above configuration, since the reference value is initialized when the privilege is granted, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-accumulating with the period until the privilege being granted as a delimiter.

Feature B15. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
initialization means for initializing the total value when a predetermined condition (end of the advantageous section) is established (function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
Specific notification execution means (display control device 81 executes processing for executing point effect by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (point suggestion effect) as notification related to numerical value for privilege to be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
Specifying means for making the execution frequency of the specific notification after the initialization of the total value by the initialization means lower than the execution frequency of the specific notification before initialization (the processing of step S2604 by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. By performing notification corresponding to the total value of each time and the given bonus value, the player can recognize that the total value increases toward the given value, and the bonus value is further increased. The desire to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized, and the privilege numerical values accumulated up to that point are lost. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notice corresponding to the total value is given as a notice related to the bonus numerical value, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notice as it is, the player will have the impression of being forced to re-accumulate. There is a concern that it will be given and the desire to continue playing will be reduced. In addition, in the configuration of performing notification corresponding to the granted numerical value for privilege, as a result of the divergence between the total value predicted by the player from the notified granted value and the actual total value, the player's response to the notification Confidence may decline. In this regard, in this configuration, since the execution frequency of the specific notification after initialization is lower than that before initialization, it is difficult for the player to notice that the total value has been initialized. can be made, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, in this feature, "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value". Also, any one of the features B1 to B15 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature B16. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
The numerical value giving means gives a privilege numerical value based on the giving opportunity in the specific state,
The initialization means performs the initialization when or when the specific state ends,
The specifying means is characterized in that the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state after the initialization is lower than the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state before the initialization. The gaming machine according to feature B15.

According to this configuration, in the configuration in which the total value is initialized by the end of the specific state, the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state after the previous specific state is suppressed low, so the total value is initialized. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the fact, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature B17. As the game state, at least a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event that is advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B16, wherein the initialization means initializes the total value when the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. By applying any one of the features B1 to B17 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature B18. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the features B1 to B17 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B18, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing and point production execution by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (point suggesting effect) as notification related to numerical value for privilege to be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing for
with
The specific notification execution means is
A first means (function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification that the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the numerical values for benefits as the specific notification; ,
After the specific notification is performed by the first means, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value when the specific notification is performed (difference value between points used and accumulated points) A second means capable of executing the specific notification based on at least part of the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. In addition, since specific notification is performed as notification corresponding to the total value each time, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the given corresponding value, and the bonus value can be further increased. The desire to do so is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly motivate players to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the frequency of specific notification by increasing the number of opportunities to give bonus numbers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the bonus numbers. On the other hand, however, if the number of opportunities to give the value for the privilege is increased, the degree of difficulty in reaching the value corresponding to the given value is lowered. There is In other words, there is a concern that if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of the specific notification, the attractiveness of the game using the special numerical value will be lost.

In this respect, in this configuration, the difference between the specific notification executed by the first means and the total value of the numerical value for the privilege, that is, the margin of the total value for the executed specific notification is used to make the identification by the second means Notification is performed. In this case, the specific notification can be performed even if the bonus value is not actually given, so it is possible to expand the execution opportunities of the specific notification without lowering the difficulty of reaching the given value. become. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of notification while maintaining the level of the privilege, and to favorably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this feature, "after the specific notification by the first means is performed, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value when the specific notification is performed (use points and accumulated The second means (the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the difference from the points)” is “the first After the specific notification is executed by the means, the difference (difference (value)) capable of executing the specific notification (the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81)".

Feature C2. The first means may execute, as the specific notification, a notification in which a player can recognize a numerical value or an amount smaller than the total value of the privilege numerical values based on the award of the privilege numerical values by the numerical value assigning means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform the specific notification by the second means by utilizing part of the increase in the total value due to the provision of the privilege numerical value. As a result, it becomes easier to secure a large value as the difference, and it becomes possible to make it appear that the total value has greatly increased by the specific notification by the second means, or to increase the number of times of specific notification by the second means.

Feature C3. Characteristic feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that the specific notification executing means can execute the specific notification by the second means in a situation where the numerical value for privilege is not given by the numerical value giving means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed by the second means in a situation where the privilege numerical value is not provided, the opportunity of the specific notification can be secured without increasing the opportunity of providing the privilege numerical value. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the reduction in the level of the privilege based on reaching the grant correspondence value.

Feature C4. The specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification by the second means in a situation where the total value has not increased after execution of the specific notification by the first means. The game machine according to any one of C1 to C3.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by the second means when the total value has not increased since the specific notification was performed by the first means, so the opportunity for specific notification is secured without increasing the opportunities for giving numerical values for benefits. can do. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the reduction in the level of the privilege based on reaching the grant correspondence value.

Feature C5. Means for determining the aspect of the specific notification by the second means based on the total value when the specific notification is performed by the first means (function of executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, comprising:

In the above configuration, since the mode of the specific notification by the second means is determined based on the total value when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the total value indicated by the specific notification by the second means and at that time can be matched with the actual sum of Therefore, it is possible to perform the specific notification in a situation where the privilege numerical value is not given, while suppressing interference with the game aiming to reach the given corresponding value.

Feature C6. A plurality of aspects (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the specific notification mode,
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification according to any aspect selected from among a plurality of aspects,
The selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the privilege numerical value given when the specific notification is performed by the first means, or the specific notification by the first means The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C5, further comprising specifying means for making the total value different depending on the total value when the game is executed.

By making the specific notification by the first means correspond to a value smaller than the actual total value, the specific notification by the first means is performed for the convenience of securing a margin for the specific notification by the second means later. indicates a too small total value, and there is a concern that it will not be possible to effectively arouse the desire to continue playing the game. In this regard, in this configuration, the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means is configured to differ depending on the privilege numerical value given at that time or the total value at that time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value is more likely to be selected as the given benefit numerical value or total value increases, since the total value is large in the first place, the smaller value Even if the specific notification is performed by the first means in correspondence, it is possible to suitably prevent the notification from becoming poor. Therefore, a corresponding total value can be indicated by both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue the game.

Feature C7. The specifying means is configured such that the privilege numerical value given when the specific notification is performed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is performed by the first means is a first value (4 points ), compared to the case of the second value (2 points) smaller than the first value, a notification that allows the player to recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the numerical values for benefits is performed. The game machine according to feature C6, wherein the selection mode is made different so as to facilitate the selection.

According to this configuration, as the selection mode when selecting the notification mode of the specific notification by the first means, the greater the given privilege numerical value or the total value, the more the notification mode corresponding to the value smaller than the total value is selected. It is easy to be That is, the larger the total value, the more likely it is that an aspect corresponding to a smaller value than the total value will be selected, and the difference for the specific notification by the second means will be more likely to be secured. It is possible to suitably suppress poor notification. Therefore, a corresponding total value can be indicated by both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue the game.

Feature C8. Limiting means capable of limiting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means (step S2604 by the display control device 81 function to execute the processing of
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the specific notification by the second means can be executed in the restricted state by the restricting means.

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific notification is restricted when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. In this case, if the specific notification is not executed at all in the restricted state, there is a concern that the player's interest in the bonus numerical value will decrease. In this regard, in this configuration, the specific notification by the second means is performed under the restricted state, so it is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the specific notification in the restricted state.

It should be noted that "when a predetermined restricted state is established" of this feature may be rephrased as "when the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (a holding point or a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from a holding point)". In this case, "the specific notification by the second means is performed based on the total value obtained in the past, so it can be executed without being restricted by the total value at the time of execution of the notification. That is, It has a characteristic that it can be executed without problems even in a situation where the execution of the specific notification is restricted depending on whether the total value is some.Using such characteristics, the specific notification by the second means can be performed in the restricted state. By using it as the specific notification, it is possible to suitably ensure the execution opportunity of the specific notification in the state." can be expected.

Feature C9. The specific notification by the second means can be executed in the restricted state based on at least part of the difference derived from the specific notification performed by the first means before the restricted state is set by the restricting means. The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized in that:

In order to perform the specific notification by the second means in the restricted state, a difference is required as a prerequisite, but in this configuration, it is derived from the specific notification by the first means in the non-restricted state. In the unrestricted state, execution of the specific notification is not restricted, and the specific notification is likely to be performed. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to preferably secure the difference.

Feature C10. Initializing means for initializing the total value of the benefit numerical values when a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous section) is established (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). ), the gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized, and the privilege numerical values accumulated up to that point are lost. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is directly reflected in the notification, there is a concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she will be forced to re-store the money, which will reduce the desire to continue playing the game. For such a configuration, it is effective to limit the execution of the specific notification in a situation where the total value after initialization is small. There is a concern that opportunities will decrease and interest in reward figures will fade. By applying the configuration of feature C8 or feature C9 in such a case, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state while making it difficult to give the impression that the total value is initialized.

In addition, in this feature, the ``initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature C11. A plurality of aspects (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the specific notification mode,
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification according to any aspect selected from among a plurality of aspects,
The selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the privilege numerical value given when the specific notification is performed by the first means, or the specific notification by the first means The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized by comprising specifying means for varying according to the total value when executing.

When a large bonus numerical value is obtained, the total value also increases, but the larger the total value, the greater the gap between the total value and the initial value when the total value is initialized. Such a large gap leads to a prolonged restricted state in subsequent games. In this regard, in this configuration, the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means is configured to differ depending on the privilege numerical value given at that time or the total value at that time. In a situation where a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value is likely to be selected, it becomes easier to secure the difference for the subsequent specific notification by the second means. If the configuration is such that the larger the total value, the more likely it is to occur, the more likely the restricted state is to be prolonged, the more easily the difference for the specific notification by the second means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to perform the specific notification by the second means in a long restricted state in which the need to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification is likely to occur.

Feature C12. The specifying means is configured such that the privilege numerical value given when the specific notification is performed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is performed by the first means is a first value (3 points ), compared to the case of the second value (2 points) smaller than the first value, a notification that allows the player to recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the numerical values for benefits is performed. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the selection mode is made different so as to facilitate the selection.

According to this configuration, as the selection mode when selecting the notification mode of the specific notification by the first means, the greater the given privilege numerical value or the total value, the more the notification mode corresponding to the value smaller than the total value is selected. It is easy to be Thereby, the difference for the specific notification by the second means can be easily ensured as the restricted state is likely to be prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to perform the specific notification by the second means in a long restricted state in which the need to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification is likely to occur.

Feature C13. When the total value of the numerical values for benefits is initialized by the initialization means, means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (function for holding the difference value by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C12, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the difference does not disappear when the total value is initialized and is maintained thereafter, so that the difference can be used across the initialization when restricting the execution of the specific notification. As a result, the specific notification can be executed by utilizing the difference generated by the specific notification before the initialization after the initialization. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C13, wherein the specific notification does not specify the numerical value for the privilege.

In the above configuration, since the special value is not specified in the specific notification, it is difficult for the player to notice even if there is a discrepancy between the specific notification by the first means and the actual total value, and the player's confidence in the notification is lowered. can be suppressed.

Feature C15. As the game state, at least a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event that is advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
with
Initializing means for initializing the total value when the specific state ends or when the specific state ends (function for executing initialization processing in the section display second processing by the main controller 101) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. By applying any one of the features C1 to C13 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of the features.

Feature C16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features C1 to C15 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C16, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
In the specific state, a numerical value giving means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of giving a bonus numerical value (points) according to the game situation;
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Initialization means for initializing the total value of the numerical values for benefits when the specific state ends (function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing and point production execution by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (point suggesting effect) as notification related to numerical value for privilege to be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing for
with
The specific notification execution means is a specific means (display a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the control device 81).

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted according to the game situation, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. By performing notification corresponding to the total value of each time and the given bonus value, the player can recognize that the total value increases toward the given value, and the bonus value is further increased. The desire to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege numerical values accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is directly reflected in the notification, there is a concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she will be forced to re-store the money, which will reduce the desire to continue playing the game. In this regard, in this configuration, when performing the specific notification regarding the privilege numerical value, the specific notification in the later specific state is performed based on at least a part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state, It is possible to suppress the fact that the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, and it is possible to favorably arouse the willingness to continue the game even after the initialization.

In addition, in this feature, "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value". In addition, in this feature, the ``initializing means for initializing the total value of the numerical values for benefits when the specific state ends (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main controller 101)'' is , ``reducing means for reducing the total value of the privilege numerical value when the specific state ends (function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main controller 101)''. .

Feature D2. When the total value in the specific state after the predetermined specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined value (retained points), the specifying means provides at least part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it executes the specific notification based on.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is small, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification can be supplemented by the notification until the total value increases, and it is possible to favorably arouse the willingness to continue the game after the total value is initialized.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the predetermined value is the total value in the predetermined specific state.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is less than the total value in the previous specific state, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification can be supplemented by the notification until the total value catches up, and it is possible to preferably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game after the total value is initialized.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3, wherein the predetermined value is a maximum value before initialization of the total value in the predetermined specific state.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is less than the maximum value before initialization, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification can be supplemented by the notification until the total value catches up to the maximum value, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to continue the game after the total value is initialized.

Feature D5. The specific notification executing means, in a situation in which the numerical value giving means does not give the special numerical value in the specific state after the predetermined specific state, determines the value of the special numerical value given in the predetermined specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it executes the specific notification based on at least a part of it.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the privilege numerical value is not given in the later specific state, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification can be supplemented by the notification until the total value increases, and it is possible to favorably arouse the willingness to continue the game after the total value is initialized.

Feature D6. Limiting means capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification (when the accumulated points are smaller than the holding points) in the specific state after the specific state (executing the processing of step S2604 by the display control device 81 function),
Characteristic features D1 to D5, wherein the specifying means executes the specified notification based on at least a part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specified state in the restricted state by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

For example, by limiting the execution of the specific notification in a situation where the total value in the later specific state is smaller than the total value in the previous specific state, it is possible to suppress the notification that the total value has decreased. This is preferable in order not to give the impression that the user is re-saving. On the other hand, however, the execution frequency of the specific notification becomes low, and as a result of the player's chances of being conscious of the privilege numerical value decreases, there is a concern that interest in the privilege numerical value will decrease. In this regard, in this configuration, in a situation where the execution of the specific notification is restricted, the specific notification is performed based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state, so the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state is suitable can be increased to

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the specifying means executes the specified notification a plurality of times based on at least a part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specified state.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the later specific state. Become.

Feature D8. The specific notification execution means is
In the predetermined specific state, the first means (display control device 81 of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification that the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the numerical values for benefits as the specific notification function to execute processing),
The specifying means determines at least a part of the difference (difference value between the used points and the accumulated points) between the specific notification by the first means and the total value (accumulated points) when the specific notification is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, further comprising a second means for executing the specific notification based on the information.

In the above configuration, in order to perform specific notification in the subsequent specific state by utilizing the difference between the value corresponding to the specific notification generated in the previous specific state and the total value, the total value notified by the notification and the actual It is possible to suitably suppress the divergence from the total value.

Feature D9. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (function for holding the difference value by the display control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature D8.

In the above configuration, even if the total value is initialized, the difference does not disappear and is maintained thereafter, so the difference can be used across the initialization. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization when executing the specific notification after initialization.

Feature D10. A plurality of game states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any one of the features D1 to D9, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature D11. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features D1 to D10 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

Feature D12. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
In the specific state, specific information variable means (points are changed in the first point lottery process and the second point lottery process by the main controller 101) that can change the specific information (total points) according to the game situation. function to be granted) and
If the specific information has a predetermined content (a privilege grant value), a privilege imparting means (processing for ending the first AT mode by the main controller 101) capable of imparting a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) to the player function) and
initialization means for initializing the specific information when the specific state ends (function for executing the initialization process in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing and point production execution by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (point suggestion effect) as notification related to the specific information by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing for
with
The specific notification execution means is means for executing the specific notification (display a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the control device 81).

According to this feature, the same effect as the feature D1 can be obtained. Any one of the features D1 to D11 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D12, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value (privilege imparting value) corresponding to the awarding of the privilege, the player is given a predetermined privilege (to the second AT mode). transition) can be granted (a function of executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (addition suggestion effect, total suggestion effect) as notification related to privilege numerical value by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and a function to execute point effect execution processing);
with
The specific notification executing means provides specific information (points that can be produced, total points) corresponding to a value greater than the value for benefits (given points) or the total value of the values for benefits (total points) given by the value giving means. Specific means for performing execution control of the specific notification based on (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4609, steps S4801 to S4811, and steps S4901 to S4911 by the display control device 81) Amusement machine.

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. In addition, since a specific notification is made as a notification regarding the privilege numerical value, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the given corresponding value, and the player will be motivated to further increase the privilege numerical value. is evoked. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly motivate players to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the frequency of specific notification by increasing the number of opportunities to give bonus numbers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the bonus numbers. On the other hand, however, if the number of opportunities to give the value for the privilege is increased, the degree of difficulty in reaching the value corresponding to the given value is lowered. There is In other words, there is a concern that if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of the specific notification, the attractiveness of the game using the special numerical value will be lost.

In this regard, in this configuration, apart from the privilege numerical value given at the time of granting, specific information corresponding to the privilege numerical value or a value larger than the total value is derived, and based on this specific information, the specific notification is performed. It is configured to perform execution control. In this case, since the specific notification can be executed on the premise of a numerical value larger than the actual numerical value for privilege or the total value thereof, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification. At this time, the specific information is only used for execution control of the specific notification and is not involved in the awarding of the privilege, so that it is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty in reaching the award corresponding value from being lowered. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game by increasing the notification frequency while preventing the game using the special numerical value from losing its appeal.

In addition, in this feature, "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value".

Feature E2. Derivation means for deriving the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or the total value thereof and a predetermined numerical value (subpoint, predetermined coefficient) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4606 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, since the special value is used for deriving the specific information, it is possible to derive the specific information while ensuring the relationship with the actually given special value. Therefore, even though the specific information different from the special value is used, it is possible to suppress the content of the specific notification from greatly deviating from the actual value of the special value. , and the actual accumulated amount (total value) of the numerical value for privilege can be matched or brought close to each other.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the deriving means derives the specific information by adding the privilege value given by the value giving means or the total value thereof to the predetermined value.

In the above configuration, since the specific information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, it is possible to secure at least the predetermined numerical value as the specific information even when there is no privilege numerical value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the numerical value for privilege is actually given at the time of provision, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature E4. Determination means for determining the value of the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (a plurality of sub-point drawing tables are provided according to the magnitude of the given points, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of obtaining sub-points corresponding to the actual awarded points from the sub-points by lottery.

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific information is determined according to the privilege numerical value, the magnitude of the privilege numerical value and the magnitude of the specific information can be linked. , the specific information can be enlarged accordingly. In this case, the greater the bonus numerical value provided, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. It is possible to suppress the divergence from the numerical value for the benefit that is provided.

In addition, this feature is "derived the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or the total value thereof and a predetermined numerical value (sub point) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value A plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points etc.) as the predetermined value (a plurality of sub-point lottery tables are provided according to the magnitude of the awarded points, from which the one corresponding to the actual awarded points is obtained. It is characterized by having a function to draw sub-points by lottery).

Feature E5. When the privilege numerical value imparted by the numerical value imparting means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value (20 points), the privilege numerical value imparted by the numerical value imparting means or the total value thereof is higher than the first predetermined value The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is configured to derive or easily derive the specific information of a larger value than when the second predetermined value (10 points) is smaller than the second predetermined value (10 points) machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the value for the given privilege, the larger the specific information (or the more likely it is), and the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification, so the game received from the specific notification It is possible to suppress the divergence between the person's impression and the actually accumulated privilege numerical value. In other words, the larger the given amount or the accumulated amount, the stronger the player's expectations will be aroused. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, the present feature is that ``the determination means determines, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a second predetermined value that is smaller than the first predetermined value, the gaming machine according to feature E4 characterized in that a larger value is determined or easily determined as the predetermined value. can.

Feature E6. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (won the transition to the advantageous section) is established, The process ends when predetermined termination conditions (the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY reaches the upper limit increased number, and the AT mode ends) are satisfied. ,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
First derivation means for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81 )When,
Second derivation means for deriving the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means (step by display control device 81 A function to execute the processing of S4604 to step S4606),
The first derivation means is means for deriving the predetermined numerical value in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first grant opportunity in the specific state (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of the advantageous section ), the gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the value for the privilege given in one specific state has reached the corresponding value, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, since the predetermined numerical value is derived in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first given opportunity in the specific state, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification from the beginning of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to progress the game in the specific state while favorably raising the player's expectation that the privilege numerical value will reach the award corresponding value.

Feature E7. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as game states, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (won a lottery for transition to an advantageous section) is met. , the game ends when predetermined termination conditions (the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY reaches the upper limit increase number, and the AT mode ends) are met. can be,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
First derivation means for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81 )When,
Second derivation means for deriving the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means (step by display control device 81 A function to execute the processing of S4604 to step S4606),
After the specific state is started, the first derivation means is provided with a predetermined trigger (when the point that can be produced becomes a predetermined value or less, the number of games from the start timing of the advantageous section, etc. reaches a predetermined number of games). Any one of the features E1 to E6, characterized in that means for deriving the predetermined numerical value based on (when it becomes true) (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 in the middle of an advantageous section). game machine.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the value for the privilege given in one specific state has reached the corresponding value, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, the predetermined numerical value is derived by a predetermined trigger that is established in the middle of the specific state. ) can be supplemented by For example, in order to ensure a certain degree of difficulty in reaching the grant corresponding value, in a configuration where the opportunity to grant the bonus value is suppressed to some extent, the bonus value will be reduced in the middle or end of the specific state. As a result of the fact that it is difficult to provide specific information, it may be difficult to maintain the player's interest in the bonus numerical value. In this respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification in the middle and final stages of the specific state, and it is possible to keep the player's interest in the bonus numerical value favorably.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the predetermined trigger is that the special value given by the value giving means or the total value thereof is equal to or less than a predetermined value.

According to the above configuration, when the numerical value for the privilege is insufficient, it is possible to make up for it with the predetermined numerical value (specific information) and execute the specific notification.

Feature E9. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (display control device 81) that performs control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means,
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means and derivation means for deriving the specific information (function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4606 by the display control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the specifying means controls the execution of the specified notification based on the specified information derived by the deriving means.

In the above configuration, not only the execution control of the specific notification but also the derivation process of the specific information is entrusted to the second control means side. You can increase the frequency. In general, in the first control means, countermeasures against fraud are strengthened compared to the second control means. However, in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means will increase. be. In such a situation, if the first control means is entrusted to the execution control of the specific notification and the derivation process of the specific information, there is a concern that the processing failure etc. will occur and the game will be hindered, but according to this feature , the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the first control means and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for a gaming machine in which the memory capacity that can be mounted on the first control means is limited.

Feature E10. The specific notification execution means is an execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the specific notification based on a predetermined execution trigger (steps S4804 to 4806 by the display control device 81, steps S7203 to S7204 are executed function), and is configured to execute the specific notification when the execution determination means determines to execute the specific notification,
A plurality of states including a first state (low-probability mode) and a second state (high-probability mode) in which the execution determination means is more likely to perform the specific notification than the first state as states related to the specific notification There is a state of
State transition means for transitioning to the second state when a predetermined transition condition (high-probability mode transition lottery win) is established in the first state (function for executing the processing of step S7105 by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the predetermined transition condition is established, the state shifts to the second state in which the execution probability of the specific notification is increased. In the second state, since the frequency of the specific notification is increased, the player's expectation that the total value for the privilege reaches the grant corresponding value is increased, and the desire to continue the game can be suitably aroused. become.

Feature E11. The specifying means is
A first means ( A function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81);
Predetermined information including the specific information updated by the first means (if no new awarded points are given after updating the possible production points by subtraction, the updated production possible points and new awarded points are awarded second means for controlling the execution of the specific notification after the predetermined specific notification based on the added value obtained by adding the given point to the updated production possible point (the production after the update by the display control device 81) A function that controls the execution of the given suggestion effect based on the possible points);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific information, and the remainder is used as a numerical value for executing the later specific notification. For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is executed based on one privilege numerical value each time a privilege numerical value is given, when a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege numerical value at that time is performed, The unused portion is then terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the specific information is performed, the unused portion is left as a numerical value for executing the later specific notification, and waste is suppressed. be. That is, since the specific information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as the subsequent specific information to be executed, it is possible to efficiently execute the specific notification with respect to the derived specific information. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the bonus numerical value can be favorably increased.

Feature E12. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
As a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode A gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that it is configured to correspond to different second predetermined values (10 points).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as modes of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest, for example, the amount of bonus numerical values to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is performed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific information) is set to a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after execution is controlled based on the predetermined information The mode will be selected regardless of the mode of the previous specific notification. As a result, there is a large discrepancy between the total bonus value predicted by the player based on each specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus value (total value), and there is concern that the player's trust in the specific notification will decline. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since the value of the magnitude corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific information, it is possible to select the later specific notification mode in relation to the previous specific notification mode. can. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total amount of privilege numerical values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual accumulated amount of privilege numerical values. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while preventing the player from losing confidence in the specific notification.

In addition, this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (bubble A plurality of aspects including production) are set, and as a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the second aspect of the It is characterized by being configured so that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification."

Feature E13. The second means includes mode determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the mode determined by the mode determination means is specified. is configured to perform annunciation,
The gaming machine according to feature E12, wherein the mode determination means comprises means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the predetermined information when executing the later specific notification. .

In the above configuration, when execution control of the subsequent specific notification based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the selection of the subsequent specific notification mode due to deviation from the actual accumulated amount of the privilege numerical value, and the sum of the privilege numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual privilege value are suppressed. It is possible to match or bring it closer to the accumulated amount of used numerical values.

Feature E14. Characteristic feature E13, characterized in that, when executing the later specific notification, the mode determination means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from a mode in which the corresponding value is equal to or less than the predetermined information among a plurality of modes. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the multiple modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is not selected. As a result, mode selection within the range of the predetermined information can be favorably performed with a simple configuration, and this is a desirable mode for realizing the configuration of feature E13.

Feature E15. after the updating by the first means is performed, if the numerical value for privilege is not given by the numerical value giving means, the specific information updated by the first means is set as the predetermined information;
After the update by the first means is performed, if a numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, addition by adding the given numerical value for privilege to the specific information updated by the first means The gaming machine according to any one of features E11 to E14, wherein the result is used as the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific information is updated, when a new numerical value for benefits is given by the numerical value giving means, the given numerical value for benefits is Predetermined information is derived by being added to the updated specific information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than when there is no such addition, as a result, the later specific notification can be made easier, and the frequency of the specific notification can be favorably increased.

Feature E16. The specifying means is
A first specifying means (a function of executing a giving suggestion effect when a point is given by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification when the numerical value for a privilege is given by the numerical value giving means;
Regardless of whether or not the provision opportunity has been established or whether or not the numerical value for privilege has been provided by the numerical value provision means, a predetermined trigger (when the continuous effect for the pseudo sign ends, when shifting to the first AT mode) A second specifying means (a function of executing a giving suggestion effect in a situation that is not a point giving opportunity by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E15, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, not only the first specifying means for executing the specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is granted by the numerical value imparting means, but also whether or not the granting opportunity is established and whether the numerical value for privilege is granted. Regardless, it has a second specifying means for executing the specified notification. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the number of opportunities to give the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game by increasing the notification frequency while suppressing the lowering of the level of the privilege due to an increase in opportunities to give the privilege numerical value.

Feature E17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (display control device 81) that performs control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means,
The second control means comprises the specific notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature E16, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the execution of a predetermined process (execution control of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor) in the second control means. .

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of the specific notification by the second specifying means is established by the execution of the predetermined process by the second control means, the specific notification by the second specifying means (the situation where the provision trigger is not established or specific notification in a situation where no numerical value for privilege is given), the degree of contribution of the first control means can be suppressed to a low level. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the first control means and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for a gaming machine in which the memory capacity that can be mounted on the first control means is limited.

Feature E18. Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) is controlled so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. function) and
with
The specific effect (continuous effect for the pseudo-prediction) is performed or was performed in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to feature E16 or feature E17, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on this.

In the above configuration, a specific effect is executed to notify the player of the determination result of the specific determination means. When the judgment result of the specific judging means is a specific result, a specific event advantageous to the player occurs, so when the specific performance is performed, the player watches the performance with high interest. is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since it is configured to execute the specific notification by the second specifying means in accordance with the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the specific notification, and to increase the interest in the numerical value for the privilege. can be effectively increased.

In addition, in this feature, the second specifying means performs the specific notification in correspondence with the specific effect corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it is expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will increase even with a configuration in which the second specifying means performs the specific notification in correspondence with the specific effect in the mode corresponding to the specified result. If the mode and execution timing of specific notifications are not well adjusted based on the relationship with specific events that occur, the effects of specific notifications cannot be properly exhibited, or the boundaries between specific events become ambiguous and the player cannot operate. There is concern that it may cause confusion. In this respect, according to this feature, such troublesome adjustment is not necessary, so that it is possible to increase the attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in labor for designing the presentation.

When this feature is applied to feature E17, "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific effect execution means. It may be provided with the configuration that

Feature E19. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
Initializing means (function of executing step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for initializing the total value of the numerical value for privilege when the specific state ends or ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E18, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the special value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to the case of accumulating bonus numbers throughout the operating hours of the game hall, the period during which the player can increase the bonus numbers is shortened, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the given corresponding value is low. tend to become As a result, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus value decreases, and it becomes difficult to motivate the player to continue the game by playing the game aiming at reaching the given corresponding value. By applying any one of the features E1 to E18 in such a situation, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification during the specific state, and when the specific state ends, the privilege value is initialized. A particularly useful configuration can be provided for the gaming machine.

In addition, in this feature, the ``initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature E20. A plurality of game states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value when the specific state ends or ends (function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E19, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, since the privilege numerical value is initialized when the specific state ends, it is difficult to accumulate the privilege numerical value as compared with the case of accumulating the privilege numerical value throughout the business hours of the game hall. By applying any one of the features E1 to E19 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature E21. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E20, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features E1 to E20 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E21, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing and point production execution by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (addition suggestion effect) as notification related to privilege numerical value by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing for
with
The specific notification execution means is
Derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced) (function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81);
Updating means for updating the specific numerical information derived by the deriving means by subtracting a value (performed point) corresponding to the predetermined specific notification from the specific numerical information derived by the deriving means when performing or performing the predetermined specific notification. (a function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81);
Predetermined information including the specific numerical information updated by the updating means (if no new given points are given after updating the possible production points by subtraction, the updated production possible points and new awarded points are given) (additional value obtained by adding the granted points to the post-update effectable points). A function that controls the execution of the given suggestion effect based on the points),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. In addition, since a specific notification is made as a notification regarding the privilege numerical value, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the given corresponding value, and the player will be motivated to further increase the privilege numerical value. is evoked. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly motivate players to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the frequency of specific notification by increasing the number of opportunities to give bonus numbers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the bonus numbers. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the remainder is used as the numerical value for executing the later specific notification. It is configured.

For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is executed based on one privilege numerical value each time a privilege numerical value is given, when a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege numerical value at that time is performed, The unused portion is then terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the specific numerical information is performed, the unused portion is left as the numerical value for executing the later specific notification, and waste is suppressed. be done. In other words, since the specific numerical information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as part of the execution of the later specific notification, it is possible to efficiently execute the specific notification with respect to the derived specific numerical information. . As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the bonus numerical value can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this feature, "derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced)" is replaced with "derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced) using the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means". can also be expressed as

Feature F2. wherein the privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege when a total value of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes the grant corresponding value regardless of the specific numerical value information; A gaming machine described in F1.

In this configuration, the specific numerical information is not referred to when giving a predetermined privilege, and the specific numerical information is treated only for executing the specific notification. In other words, since the granting of benefits using numerical values for benefits and the execution control of specific notifications using specific numerical information are independent, for example, the difficulty of granting benefits is reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the specific notification is notification corresponding to the provision of a privilege numerical value.

While the feature F1 can increase the frequency of the specific notification, the configuration of this feature makes it possible to increase the frequency of notification that the privilege numerical value is given as such a specific notification. To suitably motivate a player to continue the game because it is assumed that the player is more likely to have an impression that the total value of the privilege numerical value is increasing when many notifications of the granting of the privilege numerical value are given. becomes possible.

Feature F4. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
As the corresponding value, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and a second predetermined value different from the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is configured to correspond to a predetermined value (10 points).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as modes of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest, for example, the amount of bonus numerical values to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is performed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific numerical information) is set to a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after the execution is controlled based on the predetermined information mode will be selected regardless of the previous specific notification mode. As a result, there is a large discrepancy between the total bonus value predicted by the player based on each specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus value (total value), and there is concern that the player's trust in the specific notification will decline. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since the magnitude value corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific numerical information, the later specific notification mode can be selected in relation to the previous specific notification mode. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total amount of privilege numerical values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual accumulated amount of privilege numerical values. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while preventing the player from losing confidence in the specific notification.

It should be noted that this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (bubble medium effect) are set, and as the corresponding value, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and the specific notification of the second mode It is characterized by being configured so that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the notification."

Feature F5. The specifying means includes a mode determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determination means is configured to run
The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the mode determining means comprises means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the predetermined information when executing the later specific notification. .

In the above configuration, when execution control of the subsequent specific notification based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the selection of the subsequent specific notification mode due to deviation from the actual accumulated amount of the privilege numerical value, and the sum of the privilege numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual privilege value are suppressed. It is possible to match or bring it closer to the accumulated amount of used numerical values.

Feature F6. Characteristic feature F5, characterized in that, when executing the later specific notification, the mode determination means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from a mode in which the corresponding value is equal to or less than the predetermined information among a plurality of modes. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the multiple modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is not selected. As a result, mode selection within the range of the predetermined information can be favorably performed with a simple configuration, and this is a desirable mode for realizing the configuration of feature F5.

Feature F7. When the predetermined information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points), the specific notification executing means restricts the execution of the specific notification based on the predetermined information (processing of step S4804 by the display control device 81). A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined information is not sufficiently secured, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. It becomes possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while appropriately suppressing the deviation from.

The "predetermined specific value" of this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value necessary for executing the specific notification."

Feature F8. The identifying means includes execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the later specific notification based on the predetermined information, and when the execution determining means determines to execute the later specific notification, the later The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the specific notification of is executed.

In the above configuration, since it is determined whether or not to execute the later specific notification based on the predetermined information, the ease with which the notification is executed can be changed according to the magnitude of the predetermined information. For example, if the larger the predetermined information, the higher the probability of execution of the specific notification, the remaining predetermined information that is not used for executing the specific notification can be reduced, and the predetermined information can be used efficiently. become.

Feature F9. When the predetermined information is the first value (20 points), the execution determining means is likely to determine to execute the specific notification later than when the predetermined information is the second value (10 points). The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, the larger the predetermined information is, the more positively the specific notification is performed. Therefore, the remaining predetermined information that is not used in the execution of the specific notification can be reduced, and the predetermined information is efficiently used. becomes possible.

Feature F10. after the updating by the updating means is performed, if the numerical value for privilege is not given by the numerical value giving means, the specific numerical information updated by the updating means is set as the predetermined information;
After the updating by the updating means, if a numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the addition result of adding the given numerical value for privilege to the specific numerical information updated by the updating means as the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific numerical information is updated, when a new numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the given numerical value for privilege is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the predetermined information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than when there is no such addition, as a result, the later specific notification can be made easier, and the frequency of the specific notification can be favorably increased.

Feature F11. The derivation means calculates the specific numerical value based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or the total value thereof and a predetermined numerical value (sub point, predetermined coefficient) different from the special numerical value or the total value thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized by deriving information.

In the above configuration, since the special numerical value is used for deriving the specific numerical information, the special numerical information can be derived while ensuring the relationship with the actually given special numerical value. Therefore, even though the specific numerical information different from the special numerical value is used, it is possible to suppress the content of the specific notification from greatly deviating from the actual value of the special numerical value. It is possible to match or bring the value and the actual accumulated amount (total value) of the privilege numerical value closer.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the deriving means derives the specific numerical information by adding the special numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof to the predetermined numerical value.

In the above configuration, since the specific numerical information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, the specific notification can be executed on the assumption that the numerical value is larger than the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of feature F1, it is possible to more preferably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification. Furthermore, in this configuration, since the specific numerical information is obtained from the result of the addition, even if there is no special numerical value, it is possible to secure at least a predetermined numerical value as the specific numerical information. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the numerical value for privilege is actually given at the time of provision, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature F13. The specific notification is a notification corresponding to the provision of a numerical value for benefits,
A second specific notification executing means for controlling such that a second specific notification (total suggestive effect) corresponding to the total value of the numerical values for benefits is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. (function for executing total suggestion effect processing by the display control device 81),
The second specific notification executing means controls the execution of the second specific notification based on the addition result (total point) of the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value. (a function of executing the processing of steps S4606 and steps S4907 to S4911 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical information, which is the premise of the specific notification corresponding to the provision of the privilege numerical value, and the addition result, which is the premise of the second specific notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value, are the numerical value assignment It is obtained from the sum of the privilege value given by means and the predetermined value. That is, since the numerical values premised in each of the above notifications are aligned, the total value of the bonus numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification corresponding to the provision of the bonus numerical values, and the bonus predicted by the player from the second specific notification can be matched or approximated with the sum of the numerical values used.

Feature F14. The derivation means determines the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (step S4601 by the display control device 81 to a function of executing the processing of step S4605).

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific numerical information is determined according to the privilege numerical value, the magnitude of the privilege numerical value and the magnitude of the specific numerical information can be linked. In that case, the privilege numerical value information can be enlarged accordingly. In this case, the greater the bonus numerical value provided, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. It is possible to suppress the divergence from the numerical value for the benefit that is provided.

In addition, this feature is "the derivation means is based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and a predetermined numerical value (sub point) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value The specific numerical information is derived, and one of a plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) is set as the predetermined numerical value based on the special numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof It can also be expressed as "characterized by having determining means for determining (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81)".

Feature F15. When the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value (20 points), the deriving means determines that the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the above The specific numerical information according to any one of features F1 to F14, characterized in that the specific numerical information having a larger value is derived or is easier to derive than when the second predetermined value (10 points) is smaller than the first predetermined value. game machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the given numerical value for benefits, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical information, and the higher the frequency of specific notification and the given amount (accumulated amount) indicated by specific notification. It is possible to suppress the divergence between the player's impression and the actually accumulated privilege numerical value. In other words, the larger the given amount or the accumulated amount, the stronger the player's expectations will be aroused. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, the present feature is that ``the determination means determines, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value, the gaming machine according to feature F14 characterized in that a larger value is determined or is easier to determine as the predetermined value. can.

Feature F16. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (won the transition to the advantageous section) is established, The process ends when predetermined termination conditions (the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY reaches the upper limit increased number, and the AT mode ends) are satisfied. ,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
First derivation means for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81 )When,
Second derivation means (by display control device 81) for deriving the specific numerical information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means a function to execute the processing of steps S4604 to S4606;
with
The first derivation means includes means for deriving the predetermined numerical value in accordance with the start timing of the specific state (function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of the advantageous section). A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F15.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the value for the privilege given in one specific state has reached the corresponding value, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, since the predetermined numerical value is derived in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first given opportunity in the specific state, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification from the beginning of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to progress the game in the specific state while favorably raising the player's expectation that the privilege numerical value will reach the award corresponding value.

Feature F17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (display control device 81) that performs control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the second control means comprises the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, the derivation of the specific numerical information, the updating of the specific numerical information by subtraction of the value corresponding to the already executed specific numerical information, and the execution control of the specific notification based on the predetermined information including the updated specific numerical information are all performed by the second method. Since it is configured to be entrusted to the control means side, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. In general, in the first control means, countermeasures against fraud are strengthened compared to the second control means. However, in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means will increase. be. In such a situation, if each process such as derivation of the specific numerical information is entrusted to the first control means, there is a concern that the game may be hindered due to the occurrence of processing omissions. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the first control means and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for a gaming machine in which the memory capacity that can be mounted on the first control means is limited.

Feature F18. The specific notification execution means is a first means capable of executing the specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means (executing the giving suggestion effect at the point giving opportunity by the display control device 81 function),
Regardless of whether or not the granting opportunity has been established, or whether or not the numerical value for privilege has been granted by the numerical value granting means, the specifying means receives a predetermined opportunity (when the continuous effect for the pseudo sign ends, the first AT mode ) is established, the second means capable of executing the later specific notification based on the predetermined information (executing the giving suggestion effect in a situation that is not the point giving opportunity by the display control device 81) function).

In the above configuration, not only the first means for executing specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, but also whether or not the giving opportunity is established and whether or not the numerical value for privilege is given is determined. Regardless, it comprises a second means for executing specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the number of opportunities to give the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the desire to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the loss of the attractiveness of the game using the special numerical value.

Feature F19. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (display control device 81) that performs control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means,
The second control means comprises the specific notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature F18, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the execution of a predetermined process (execution control of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor) in the second control means. .

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of the specific notification by the second specifying means is established by the execution of the predetermined process by the second control means, the specific notification by the second specifying means (the situation where the provision trigger is not established or specific notification in a situation where no numerical value for privilege is given), the degree of contribution of the first control means can be suppressed to a low level. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the first control means and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for a gaming machine in which the memory capacity that can be mounted on the first control means is limited.

Feature F20. Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) is controlled so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. function) and
with
The specific effect (continuous effect for the pseudo-prediction) is performed or was performed in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to feature F18 or feature F19, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on this.

In the above configuration, a specific effect is executed to notify the player of the determination result of the specific determination means. When the judgment result of the specific judging means is a specific result, a specific event advantageous to the player occurs, so when the specific performance is performed, the player watches the performance with high interest. is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since it is configured to execute the specific notification by the second specifying means in accordance with the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the specific notification, and to increase the interest in the numerical value for the privilege. can be effectively increased.

In addition, in this feature, the second specifying means performs the specific notification in correspondence with the specific effect corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it is expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will increase even with a configuration in which the second specifying means performs the specific notification in correspondence with the specific effect in the mode corresponding to the specified result. If the mode and execution timing of specific notifications are not well adjusted based on the relationship with specific events that occur, the effects of specific notifications cannot be properly exhibited, or the boundaries between specific events become ambiguous and the player cannot operate. There is concern that it may cause confusion. In this respect, according to this feature, such troublesome adjustment is not necessary, so that it is possible to increase the attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in labor for designing the presentation.

Feature F21. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
Initializing means (function of executing step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for initializing the total value of the numerical value for privilege when the specific state ends or ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F20, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the special value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to the case of accumulating bonus numbers throughout the operating hours of the game hall, the period during which the player can increase the bonus numbers is shortened, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the given corresponding value is low. tend to become As a result, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus value decreases, and it becomes difficult to motivate the player to continue the game by playing the game aiming at reaching the given corresponding value. By applying any one of the features F1 to F20 in such a situation, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification during the specific state, and when the specific state ends, the privilege value is initialized. A particularly useful configuration can be provided for the gaming machine.

In addition, in this feature, the ``initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature F22. A plurality of game states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value when the specific state ends or ends (function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F21, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the special value is initialized when the specific state ends, making it difficult to accumulate the special value compared to the case of accumulating the special value throughout one business day of the game hall. . By applying any one of the features F1 to F21 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature F23. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F22, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features F1 to F22 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F23, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (addition suggestion effect) as notification corresponding to the granting of numerical values for benefits to be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and a function to execute point effect execution processing);
with
The specific notification execution means is
A first means capable of executing the specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means (function of executing the giving suggestion effect at the point giving opportunity by the display control device 81);
Regardless of whether or not the provision opportunity has been established or whether or not the numerical value for privilege has been provided by the numerical value provision means, a predetermined trigger (when the continuous effect for the pseudo sign ends, when shifting to the first AT mode) A second means capable of executing the specific notification based on (a function of executing a giving suggestion effect in a situation that is not a point giving opportunity by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. In addition, since the specific notification is performed as a notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value, the player can recognize that the privilege numerical value has been granted by the specific notification each time, and the total value is increased toward the grant corresponding value. It becomes possible to recognize the increase. As a result, the desire to further increase the bonus numerical value is aroused, and it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly motivate players to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the frequency of specific notification by increasing the number of opportunities to give bonus numbers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the bonus numbers. On the other hand, however, if the number of opportunities to give the value for the privilege is increased, the degree of difficulty in reaching the value corresponding to the given value is lowered. There is In other words, there is a concern that if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of the specific notification, the attractiveness of the game using the special numerical value will be lost.

In this respect, in this feature, not only the first means for executing the specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, but also whether or not the giving opportunity has been established A second means is provided for performing the specific notification whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the number of opportunities to give the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the desire to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the loss of the attractiveness of the game using the special numerical value.

Feature G2. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (display control device 81) that performs control so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means,
The second control means comprises the specific notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined opportunity is established based on the execution of a predetermined process (execution control of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor) in the second control means. .

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of the specific notification by the second means is established by the execution of the predetermined process by the second control means, the specific notification by the second means (situation where the grant trigger is not established or privilege The degree of contribution of the first control means can be suppressed to a low level in execution control of the specific notification in a situation where the use value is not assigned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. In general, in the first control means, countermeasures against fraud are strengthened compared to the second control means. However, in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means will increase. be. In such a situation, if the first control means is entrusted to the execution control of the specific notification by the second means, there is a concern that processing omission etc. will occur and the game will be hindered, but according to this feature, The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complication of the processing configuration of the first control means and to simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for a gaming machine in which the memory capacity that can be mounted on the first control means is limited.

Feature G3. Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) is controlled so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. function) and
with
The specific effect (continuous effect for the pseudo-prediction) is performed or was performed in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on this.

In the above configuration, a specific effect is executed to notify the player of the determination result of the specific determination means. When the judgment result of the specific judging means is a specific result, a specific event advantageous to the player occurs, so when the specific performance is performed, the player watches the performance with high interest. is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since the specific notification by the second means is executed in accordance with the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the specific notification, and to increase the interest in the numerical value for the privilege. can be increased effectively.

In addition, in this feature, the specific notification is performed by the second means in correspondence with the specific effect corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will increase even with a configuration in which the specific notification is performed by the second means in correspondence with the specific effect corresponding to the specific result. If the mode and execution timing of specific notifications are not well adjusted in consideration of the relationship with specific events, the effects of specific notifications cannot be properly demonstrated, or the boundaries between specific events become ambiguous and players are confused. I have concerns about being invited. In this respect, according to this feature, such troublesome adjustment is not necessary, so that it is possible to increase the attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in labor for designing the presentation.

When this feature is applied to feature G2, "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific effect execution means. It may be provided with the configuration that

Feature G4. A plurality of variable display areas (each visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R),
The specific effect is executed over a period in which a game is played a plurality of times in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and then the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. The game machine according to feature G3, characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the specific effect is performed over a plurality of games, the specific effect can be made more conspicuous than other effects. Under such a configuration, in order to execute the specific notification corresponding to the provision of the privilege numerical value based on the fact that the specific effect in the mode corresponding to the non-specific result is performed or has been performed, the player is sent to the specific notification It is possible to make it easy to attract attention, and it becomes possible to effectively increase interest in the numerical value for privilege.

The present feature may further include a configuration that "the second means executes the specific notification in the final game of the specific effect or in the game subsequent to the final game." In this case, the player can see the specific notification after watching the ending of the specific effect, and it is possible to suppress confusion between the specific effect and the specific notification.

Feature G5. A plurality of variable display areas (each visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. (areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and then variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. is configured as
When the number of times of the game has reached a predetermined number from a predetermined timing (execution game of the previous grant suggestion effect, game of establishment of the grant opportunity, start game of the advantageous section, power on, etc.), the predetermined trigger The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that it is constructed so that

In the above configuration, for example, by setting the predetermined timing to be the previous execution game of the specific notification, it is possible to prevent the interval between the specific notifications from becoming longer and the player's interest in the bonus numerical value from diminishing.

Feature G6. The mode of the specific notification executed by the first means and the mode of the specific notification executed by the second means are configured such that the player cannot identify each of the specific notifications. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features G1 to G5.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means cannot be distinguished, when the specific notification by the second means is executed, the player is made to think that the numerical value for the privilege is given. can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the privilege numerical value and suitably arouse the player's desire to continue playing the game, even though the privilege numerical value is not actually given or the granting opportunity is not established. be possible.

Feature G7. The specific notification execution means is
Derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced) (function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81);
When the specific notification is performed or performed by the first means, updating the specific numerical information by subtracting the value (produced point) corresponding to the specific notification from the specific numerical information derived by the deriving means. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81);
with
The second means is provided with predetermined information including the specific numerical information updated by the updating means (if new points have not been given after updating the points that can be produced by subtraction, the points that can be produced after the update, new points that can be given The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the specific notification is performed based on the added value obtained by adding the given points to the updated effectable points when the points are given. .

In the above configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the remainder is used as a numerical value for executing the specific notification later. . For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is executed based on one privilege numerical value each time a privilege numerical value is given, when a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege numerical value at that time is performed, The unused portion is then terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the specific numerical information is performed, the unused portion is left as the numerical value for executing the later specific notification, and waste is suppressed. be done. In other words, since the specific numerical information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as part of the execution of the later specific notification, it is possible to efficiently execute the specific notification with respect to the derived specific numerical information. . As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the bonus numerical value can be favorably increased.

Feature G8. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
As a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode A gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that it is configured to correspond to different second predetermined values (10 points).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as modes of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest, for example, the amount of bonus numerical values to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is performed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific numerical information) is set to a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after the execution is controlled based on the predetermined information mode will be selected regardless of the previous specific notification mode. As a result, there is a large discrepancy between the total bonus value predicted by the player based on each specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus value (total value), and there is concern that the player's trust in the specific notification will decline. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since the magnitude value corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific numerical information, the later specific notification mode can be selected in relation to the previous specific notification mode. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total amount of privilege numerical values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual accumulated amount of privilege numerical values. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while preventing the player from losing confidence in the specific notification.

In addition, this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (bubble A plurality of aspects including production) are set, and as a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the second aspect of the It is characterized by being configured so that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification."

Feature G9. The second means includes mode determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the mode determined by the mode determination means is specified. is configured to perform annunciation,
The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the mode determining means comprises means for determining the mode of the specific notification within the range of the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, when execution control of the subsequent specific notification based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the selection of the subsequent specific notification mode due to deviation from the actual accumulated amount of the privilege numerical value, and the sum of the privilege numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual privilege value are suppressed. It is possible to match or bring it closer to the accumulated amount of used numerical values.

Feature G10. Characteristic feature G9, characterized in that, when executing the later specific notification, the mode determination means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from a mode in which the corresponding value is equal to or less than the predetermined information among a plurality of modes. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the multiple modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is not selected. As a result, mode selection within the range of the predetermined information can be favorably performed with a simple configuration, and this is a desirable mode for realizing the configuration of feature G9.

Feature G11. When the predetermined information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points), the specific notification executing means restricts the execution of the specific notification by the second means (processing of step S4804 by the display control device 81). A gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G10, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined information is not sufficiently secured, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. It becomes possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while appropriately suppressing the deviation from.

The "predetermined specific value" of this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value necessary for executing the specific notification."

Feature G12. after the updating by the updating means is performed, if the numerical value for privilege is not given by the numerical value giving means, the specific numerical information updated by the updating means is set as the predetermined information;
After the updating by the updating means, if a numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the addition result of adding the given numerical value for privilege to the specific numerical information updated by the updating means as the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific numerical information is updated, when a new numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, the given numerical value for privilege is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the predetermined information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than when there is no such addition, as a result, the later specific notification can be made easier, and the frequency of the specific notification can be favorably increased.

Feature G13. The derivation means adds the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or the total value thereof to the privilege numerical value or the predetermined numerical value (sub point, predetermined coefficient) different from the total value thereof to obtain the specified value. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G12, wherein numerical information is derived.

In the above configuration, since the specific numerical information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, the specific notification can be executed on the assumption that the numerical value is larger than the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of feature G1, it is possible to more preferably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification.

In this case, since the special numerical value is used for deriving the specific numerical information, the special numerical information can be derived while ensuring the relationship with the actually given special numerical value. Therefore, even though the specific numerical information different from the special numerical value is used, it is possible to suppress the content of the specific notification from greatly deviating from the actual value of the special numerical value. It is possible to match or bring the value and the actual accumulated amount (total value) of the privilege numerical value closer.

Further, since the specific numerical value information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, at least the predetermined numerical value can be secured as the specific numerical value information even if there is no privilege numerical value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the numerical value for privilege is actually given at the time of provision, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature G14. A second specific notification executing means for controlling such that a second specific notification (total suggestive effect) corresponding to the total value of the numerical values for benefits is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. (function for executing total suggestion effect processing by the display control device 81),
The second specific notification executing means controls the execution of the second specific notification based on the addition result (total point) of the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value. (a function of executing the processing of step S4606 and steps S4907 to S4911 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical information, which is the premise of the specific notification corresponding to the provision of the privilege numerical value, and the addition result, which is the premise of the second specific notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value, are the numerical value assignment It is obtained from the sum of the privilege value given by means and the predetermined value. That is, since the numerical values premised in each of the above notifications are aligned, the total value of the bonus numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification corresponding to the provision of the bonus numerical values, and the bonus predicted by the player from the second specific notification can be matched or approximated with the sum of the numerical values used.

Feature G15. The derivation means determines the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (step S4601 by the display control device 81 to a function of executing the processing of step S4605).

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific numerical information is determined according to the privilege numerical value, the magnitude of the privilege numerical value and the magnitude of the specific numerical information can be linked. In that case, the privilege numerical value information can be enlarged accordingly. In this case, the greater the bonus numerical value provided, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. It is possible to suppress the divergence from the numerical value for the benefit that is provided.

In addition, this feature is "the derivation means is based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof and a predetermined numerical value (sub point) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value The specific numerical information is derived, and one of a plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) is set as the predetermined numerical value based on the special numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof It can also be expressed as "characterized by having determining means for determining (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81)".

Feature G16. When the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value (20 points), the deriving means determines that the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the above Characteristic feature G7 to G15 according to any one of features G7 to G15, characterized in that the specific numerical information having a larger value is derived or is easier to derive than when the second predetermined value (10 points) is smaller than the first predetermined value. game machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the given numerical value for benefits, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical information, and the higher the frequency of specific notification and the given amount (accumulated amount) indicated by specific notification. It is possible to suppress the divergence between the player's impression and the actually accumulated privilege numerical value. In other words, the larger the given amount or the accumulated amount, the stronger the player's expectations will be aroused. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, the present feature is that ``the determination means determines, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value, the gaming machine according to feature G15 characterized in that a larger value is determined or easily determined as the predetermined value. can.

Feature G17. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the grant corresponding value,
Initializing means (function of executing step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for initializing the total value of the numerical value for privilege when the specific state ends or ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the special value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, the period during which the player can increase the bonus value is shortened compared to the case where the bonus value is accumulated throughout the business hours of the game hall, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the given corresponding value is reduced. tends to As a result, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus value decreases, and it becomes difficult to motivate the player to continue the game by playing the game aiming at reaching the given corresponding value. By applying any one of the features G1 to G16 in such a situation, it is possible to favorably increase the motivation to continue playing the game even though the total value for the benefit is initialized with the end of the specific state. become.

In addition, in this feature, the ``initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)'' includes the ``total value of the privilege numerical value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by main controller 101) for reducing .

Feature G18. A plurality of game states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur game state is set,
Specific determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (process for shifting to AT mode by main controller 101, a function to execute a winning result response process);
specific state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific state when a predetermined transition condition is established (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first processing by the main controller 101);
a specific state ending means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the specific state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical value when the specific state ends or ends (function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G17, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events that are advantageous to the player and the awarding of special numerical values can be received only in specific states, and the specific states are emphasized as situations in which the enjoyment of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the special value is initialized when the specific state ends, making it difficult to accumulate the special value compared to the case of accumulating the special value throughout one business day of the game hall. . By applying any one of the features G1 to G17 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effects of the features.

Feature G19. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the first operating means is operated, and stopping the circulating of the circulating bodies when the second operating means is operated function to execute reel control processing),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for paying out the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G18, characterized by comprising:

By applying any one of the above features G1 to G18 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exhibit the above effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G19, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Numerical value granting means capable of granting privilege numerical values (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity) (function for executing first point lottery processing and second point lottery processing by main control unit 101 )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes an imparting corresponding value corresponding to the impartation of the privilege, a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode) can be imparted to the player. privilege giving means (function for executing the first AT mode end processing by the main control device 101);
Specific notification execution means (point processing and point production execution by display control device 81) for controlling specific notification (addition suggestion effect) as notification related to privilege numerical value by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing for
with
The specific notification execution means is
As the specific notification, the first means for executing the first specific notification (addition suggestion effect) as the notification corresponding to the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means function) and
Second means for executing a second specific notification (total suggestive effect) as a report corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value as the specific report (function of executing the total suggestive effect process by the display control device 81);
with
A plurality of aspects (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the mode of the first specific notification,
The second means is mode determination means for determining the mode of the second specific notification based on the mode of the first specific notification executed previously (step S8201, step S8202, step S8305 by the display control device 81, step S8306, a function of executing the processing of steps S8308 to S8310), and executing the second specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determining means.

In this configuration, a privilege numerical value is granted upon establishment of a grant opportunity, and when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted to the player. In addition, since the first specific notification corresponding to the provision of the privilege numerical value is provided in a plurality of modes, it is possible to suggest the amount of the privilege numerical value to be given depending on which mode the first specific notification is performed. . Also, apart from the first specific notification, a second specific notification is performed as a notification corresponding to the total value of the given privilege numerical values. By executing both notifications, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the given value, and is motivated to further increase the privilege numerical value. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Under such a configuration, for example, in the configuration in which the first specific notification is performed through the execution lottery, the first specific notification may not be performed even if the numerical value for the privilege is actually given. Judging from the notification, the privilege grant value should not be accumulated so much, but the second specific notification suggests a large total value, etc., and the total value predicted by the player from the first specific notification and the second specific notification. A situation may arise in which the total value deviates greatly from the In this case, the player may be confused as to which specific information to trust. In this regard, in this feature, the aspect of the first specific notification executed earlier, that is, the aspect of the second specific notification is determined based on the performance of the first specific notification, so the second specific notification suggests, etc. The total value can be matched or approximated with the predicted total value from the first specific notification, and confusion of the player can be suitably suppressed.

Feature H2. A value (produced point) is set for each aspect of the first specific notification,
The specific notification execution means is a derivation means for deriving a cumulative addition value (total point) of values corresponding to the previously executed first specific notification mode (the processing of steps S8203 and S8204 by the display control device 81 is function to execute),
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the mode determining means determines the mode of the second specific notification based on the cumulative added value derived by the deriving means.

In the above configuration, a unique value is set for each aspect of the first specific notification, and by deriving the cumulative addition value of the values corresponding to the previously executed first specific notification aspect, the executed It is possible to easily grasp the actual results of the first specific notification. Therefore, by determining the mode of the second specific notification based on this cumulative added value, it is possible to suitably implement the second specific notification based on the performance of the first specific notification.

Feature H3. Initializing means for initializing the total value of the benefit numerical values when a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous section) is established (the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). ),
Characteristic feature H1, wherein the mode determination means determines the mode of the second specific notification based on the mode of the first specific notification performed after the initialization by the initialization means and executed earlier The game machine according to feature H2.

In the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed based on the performance of the first specific notification after the total value of the numerical values for benefits is initialized. In this case, since the performance of the first specific notification before initialization is no longer referred to when determining the mode of the second specific notification, the second specific notification indicates a value larger than the actual sum of the specific numerical values. is suppressed, and it becomes possible to execute the second specific notification corresponding to the actual total value of the numerical value for the privilege.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature H2, "when the total of the benefit numerical values is initialized by the initialization means, the second initialization means for initializing the cumulative addition value derived by the derivation means It may further comprise a configuration of "comprises

Feature H4. The second means is
a first mode determining means as the mode determining means;
In a predetermined case (when the total value of the given points is equal to or greater than the privilege corresponding value), regardless of the mode of the first specific notification previously executed, a second mode determination that determines the mode of the second specific notification means (the function of executing the processing of steps S8304 and S8307 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized by comprising:

For example, when a large privilege numerical value is given at one time of giving, the total value of the privilege numerical value suddenly increases. In this case, the performance of the first specific notification tends to be insufficient for the increased total value of the numerical values for benefits, and there is a concern that only a small value can be notified in the second specific notification. In this regard, in this configuration, depending on the situation, the mode of the second specific notification can be determined regardless of the performance of the first specific notification. can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with a case where the total value of the privilege numerical values suddenly increases.

Feature H5. The second mode determining means determines a predetermined value (privilege granting value, the value obtained by adding the selected sub-points to the privilege grant value) or more, the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the mode of the first specific notification executed previously. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature H4.

In the above configuration, when the total value of the numerical values for benefits becomes a predetermined value or more, regardless of the performance of the first specific notification, the mode of the second specific notification is determined. In a case such as when the total value of the privilege numerical values suddenly increases due to the provision of numerical values, it becomes possible to notify a large value by means of the second specific notification.

Feature H6. When the total value of the numerical values for benefits is equal to or greater than the grant correspondence value, or the value corresponding to the total value corresponds to the grant correspondence value (selected sub-points are given as a privilege). The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that, when it becomes equal to or more than the value added to the value, the aspect of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the aspect of the first specific notification executed previously. .

In the above configuration, when the total value of the numerical values for benefits is equal to or greater than the corresponding value for granting, the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the track record of the first specific notification, so the track record of the first specific notification is sufficient. It becomes possible to execute the notification corresponding to the fact that it becomes equal to or greater than the given corresponding value even in a situation where it is not.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H6, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, features The technical ideas shown in any one of H1 to H6 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature H group to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group H detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts. When applying each of the above features to a pachinko gaming machine, it can be understood that a game (one game) relating to each feature is a variation (one variation).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled by inserting a game ball through the above.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 32... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop switch, 65... Auxiliary display part, 81... Display control device, 101... Main control device.

Claims (1)

a numerical value giving means capable of giving a numerical value for a privilege based on a predetermined giving opportunity;
privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege to a player when the total value of the privilege numerical values imparted by the numerical value imparting means becomes a grant corresponding value corresponding to granting of the privilege;
a specific notification execution means for controlling such that a specific notification is executed by a predetermined notification means as a notification related to the privilege numerical value;
with
The specific notification executing means comprises a specific means for controlling the execution of the specific notification based on the specific information corresponding to the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value assigning means or a value larger than the total value of the privilege numerical values. A game machine characterized by

Images